Introduction 9
Child Safety 16
Child seats ...........................................18
Child seat positioning ...................................18
Booster seats .........................................20
Installing child seats with lap and shoulder belts................22
Installing child safety seats with lower anchors and tethers for
children.............................................26
Installing child safety seats with tether straps..................28
Child safety locks ......................................30
Safety Belts 31
Fastening the safety belts ................................33
Safety belt height adjustment .............................37
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................37
Safety belt-minder .....................................38
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................40
Personal Safety System 41
Supplementary Restraints System 42
Driver and passenger airbags..............................44
Front passenger sensing system............................46
Side airbags ..........................................49
Safety canopy curtain airbags .............................51
Crash sensors and airbag indicator..........................53
Airbag disposal ........................................54
Keys and Remote Control 55
General information on radio frequencies .....................55
Remote control........................................56
Replacing a lost key or remote control .......................61
Table of Contents 1
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey 62
Settings, MyKey .......................................62
Creating.............................................63
Clearing .............................................63
System status .........................................64
Remote start, MyKey ...................................64
Troubleshooting, MyKey .................................66
Locks 68
Locking and unlocking ..................................68
SecuriCode™ keyless entry keypad .........................75
Security 78
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system .......................78
Anti-theft alarm .......................................80
Steering Wheel 81
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................81
Steering wheel controls..................................83
Wipers and Washers 86
Windshield wipers......................................86
Rain-sensing wipers ....................................86
Windshield washers.....................................87
Rear-window wiper and washer ............................87
Lighting 88
Lighting control .......................................88
Autolamps ...........................................89
Instrument lighting dimmer ...............................89
Headlamp exit delay ....................................90
Daytime running lamps ..................................90
Front fog lamps .......................................91
Adaptive headlamps ....................................91
Directionindicators ....................................92
Interior lamps.........................................92
2 Table of Contents
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors 94
Power windows .......................................94
Exteriormirrors.......................................95
Interiormirrors........................................97
Sun visors ...........................................98
Moonroof ............................................98
Instrument Cluster 101
Gauges .............................................101
Warning lamps and indicators ............................101
Audible warnings and indicators ..........................106
Information Displays 107
Controls ............................................107
Information messages ..................................114
Audio System 123
MyLincoln Touch™ system ..............................125
Climate Control 127
Dual automatic temperature control ........................127
Rear window defroster .................................129
Cabin air filter .......................................129
Seats 131
Sitting in the correct position ............................131
Head restraints .......................................132
Power seats .........................................133
Memory function......................................135
Heated and cooled seats ................................136
Rear seats ..........................................138
Universal Garage Door Opener 142
HomeLink威 wireless control system ........................142
Table of Contents 3
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Auxiliary Power Points 147
Storage Compartments 148
Center console .......................................148
Overhead console .....................................148
Starting and Stopping the Engine 149
Keyless starting ......................................150
Starting the engine ....................................152
Engine block heater ...................................153
Fuel and Refueling 155
Fuel quality .........................................156
Running out of fuel ....................................157
Refueling...........................................158
Fuel consumption .....................................160
Transmission 164
Automatic transmission .................................164
Hill start assist .......................................168
All-Wheel Drive 170
All wheel drive .......................................170
Brakes 176
Brakes .............................................176
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................177
Parking brake ........................................177
Traction Control 178
TractionControl™ ....................................178
Stability Control 179
AdvanceTrac威 ........................................180
4 Table of Contents
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Parking Aids 181
Sensing system .......................................181
Rear-view camera system ...............................183
Cruise Control 187
Using cruise control ...................................187
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ............................188
Driving Aids 196
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) .............................................196
Collision warning system ................................201
Steering............................................205
Load Carrying 206
Cargo net ...........................................206
Roof racks and load carriers .............................208
Utility hooks .........................................209
Vehicle loading .......................................209
Towing 217
Trailertowing........................................217
Wrecker towing.......................................221
Recreational towing....................................222
Driving Hints 224
Economical driving ....................................224
Floormats..........................................226
Roadside Emergencies 228
Getting roadside assistance ..............................228
Hazard warning flashers ................................229
Fuel cut-off switch ....................................229
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................230
Table of Contents 5
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customer Assistance 233
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)........................239
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................240
Fuses 241
Changing a fuse ......................................241
Fuses and relays ......................................241
Fuse specification chart.................................242
Maintenance 250
General information ...................................250
Opening and closing the hood ............................251
Under hood overview ..................................252
Engine oil dipstick ....................................253
Engine oil check ......................................253
Engine coolant check ..................................254
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................258
Brake fluid check .....................................260
Fuel filter ...........................................260
Washer fluid check ....................................261
Changing the vehicle battery .............................261
Checking the wiper blades...............................263
Changing the wiper blades...............................264
Air filter(s)..........................................265
Adjusting the headlamps ................................266
Changing a bulb ......................................267
Bulb specification chart.................................272
6 Table of Contents
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care 273
Cleaning products .....................................273
Cleaning the exterior...................................273
Waxing.............................................275
Repairing minor paint damage ............................275
Cleaning the engine ...................................275
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................276
Cleaning the interior ...................................276
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......277
Cleaning leather seats ..................................278
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................278
Vehicle storage .......................................279
Wheels and Tires 282
Tire care ...........................................284
Using snow chains.....................................300
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....................301
Changing a road wheel .................................305
Technical specifications .................................310
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................310
Capacities and Specifications 312
Engine specifications...................................312
Part numbers........................................317
Vehicle identification number.............................317
Vehicle certification label................................318
Transmission code designation ............................319
Accessories 320
Accessories..........................................320
Table of Contents 7
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Extended Service Plan 322
Scheduled Maintenance 326
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................331
MyLincoln Touch™ 345
Privacy Information....................................351
Infotainment display ...................................352
Voice recognition .....................................353
Listening to music.....................................360
Phone features .......................................387
Information Menu .....................................394
Menu features........................................405
Settings............................................408
Climate features ......................................414
Navigation system .....................................417
Appendices 429
Index 447
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2011
8 Table of Contents
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using
and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle.. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
Information in this respect is highlighted in this manual with the tree
symbol.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Introduction 9
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety Alert See Owner’s
Manual
Fasten Safety
Belt
Airbag –
Front
Airbag – Side Child Seat
Lower An-
chor
Child Seat
Tether An-
chor
Brake Sys-
tem
Anti-Lock
Brake Sys-
tem
Parking
Brake Sys-
tem
Brake Fluid –
Non-
Petroleum
Base
Parking Aid
System
Stability Con-
trol System
Cruise Con-
trol
Master Light-
ing Switch
Hazard Warn-
ing Flasher
Fog Lamps –
Front
Fuse Com-
partment
Fuel Pump
Reset
Windshield
Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/
Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/
Demist
Power Win-
dows Front/
Rear
Power Win-
dow Lockout
Child Safety
Door Lock/
Unlock
Interior Lug-
gage Com-
partment Re-
lease
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil Engine Cool-
ant
Engine Cool-
ant Tempera-
ture
10 Introduction
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Do Not Open
When Hot
Battery Avoid Smok-
ing, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid Explosive
Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steer-
ing Fluid
Maintain Cor-
rect Fluid
Level
Service En-
gine Soon
Engine Air
Filter
Cabin Air
Filter
Jack
Check Fuel
Cap
Low Tire
Pressure
Warning
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
Introduction 11
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
12 Introduction
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威 chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威
supplement for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, safety
belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate
material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for more
information.
Introduction 13
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE FINANCIAL SERVICES (U.S. ONLY)
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers a full range of financing and
lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or
leased your vehicle through Lincoln Automotive Financial Services, thank
you for you business.
For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as
help manage your account.
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
For more information regarding Lincoln Automotive Financial Services, as
well as access Account Manager, please go to www.LincolnAFS.com.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment
to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
14 Introduction
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
Introduction 15
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child
height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
16 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or
younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than
age four (4) and less than age
twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder
and chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
Child Safety 17
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for Infants,
toddlers or children weighing 40 lb
(18 kg) or less (generally age four
or younger)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine
if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight,
or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and
warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the
instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer. A
safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for
your child’s height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may
increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
18 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Child Safety 19
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be
necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See the Seats chapter for
information on head restraints.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg)
and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet
9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap/shoulder
belt.
20 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s hips.
Child Safety 21
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS WITH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
22 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat back in the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5.
This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
Child Safety 23
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
24 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in
the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps
to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Installing child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
Child Safety 25
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
INSTALLING CHILD SAFETY SEATS WITH Lower Anchors AND
Tethers FOR CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
26 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback
below the symbols as shown. Follow
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Installing child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating
Positions (Center Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 11 in. (28 cm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
Child Safety 27
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
18 in. (46 cm) apart. A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot
be installed at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child seats
(with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating
position provided that the child seat manufacturer’s instructions permit
use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child seat to any
lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
INSTALLING CHILD SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
28 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the head restraint posts. For the center seating
positions, route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also be removed.
2. Locate the correct anchor behind
the gap cover for the selected
seating position.
3. Pull the gap cover reward to
expose the anchors. Clip the tether
strap to the anchor as shown.
Child Safety 29
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
30 Child Safety
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
Safety Belts 31
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
• Retractor and anchor pretensioner at the front outboard seating
positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. Refer to Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in
the Supplemental Restraint System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s
body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety
belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated
alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
32 Safety Belts
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
When in use, the rear outboard safety
belts can be used with the comfort
guides. This guide is attached to the
head restraint and is stored in a pocket
in the seatback.
Safety Belts 33
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide.
2. Slide the guide up or down along the
webbing so that the belt is centered on the
occupant’s shoulder.
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belt. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
34 Safety Belts
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the front
outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. Refer to the Child Safety chapter.
Safety Belts 35
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
36 Safety Belts
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
Front seats
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height, pull on the
center button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Safety Belts 37
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER姞
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s and/or front passenger’s
seat is occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder威 feature for objects
placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to large
front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have expired (warnings for approximately
five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder威 feature.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belts are buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
safety belt is not buckled when the
vehicle has reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch
has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
safety belt becomes unbuckled for
approximately one minute while
the vehicle is traveling at least
6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since the
ignition switch has been turned to
on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
38 Safety Belts
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Deactivating/Activating the Belt-Minder姞 Feature
WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted
and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. To reduce
the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the system while driving
the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warning are deactivated/activated
independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not
buckle the other position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition is off
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
The system can be deactivated/activated by performing the following
procedure:
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately
1–2 minutes).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
Safety Belts 39
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 12
times in three seconds.
• This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently
disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 12
times in three seconds.
One-time Belt-Minder姞 disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the system is disabled for the
current ignition cycle. The feature will enable during the same ignition
cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately
30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one-time disable.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Cleaning the Interior in
the Vehicle Care chapter.
40 Safety Belts
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off/on indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module. During a crash, the
Restraints Control Module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
Personal Safety System 41
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
42 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result
from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a
result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags
must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or the safety belt
pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button is pressed on the remote entry transmitter, or
• the vehicle runs out of power.
Supplementary Restraints System 43
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator
later in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system.
44 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in.
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING:
Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger
seat sensing system.
WARNING:
Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s
seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant
and determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a passenger airbag status
indicator which will illuminate
indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled)
or OFF (disabled). The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack
of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on
to confirm it is functional.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat
is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator
will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the vehicle off, remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator
Passenger Airbag
Empty
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Child
OFF: Lit
Disabled
ON: Unlit
Adult
OFF: Unlit
Enabled
ON: Lit
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is
illuminated, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the previous list.
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating
properly, refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that may
be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with
the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in
the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains
illuminated, this may or may/not be a problem due to the front
passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s manual.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats),
or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating
that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the seatback of
the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system
Note:
The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled passenger seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY CANOPY姞 CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and curtain airbag is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the
A, B, C or D pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side collisions or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact collisions and rollover events.
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The system consists of the
following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags
fitted above the trim panels over
the front and rear side windows
identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
The vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM) which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy威. Based on the
type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Refer to
Warning lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or
lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the restaints control module to
deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were
not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the
collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side collisions, and in
rollovers.
• Side airbags are designed to inflate in side-impact collisions, not
rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact
collisions or rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or
rollover likelihood.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
54 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
• remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors
• remotely open the power liftgate
• remotely start or stop the engine
• arm and disarm the anti-theft system
• activate the panic alarm
• activate the global open windows.
Intelligent Access
Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without
actively using a key or remote control. You can use this feature at the
front doors or at the liftgate or trunk. You can activate the intelligent
access feature as long as you have one of your intelligent access keys
within range of the front doors or the liftgate or trunk.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
The remote control complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Keys and Remote Control 55
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your
vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when commanded (either by
touching the inside of the driver door or front passenger exterior door
handle, by activating the exterior power trunk or liftgate button, or a
button on the transmitter itself). If excessive radio frequency interface is
present in the area, or if the transmitter battery is low, it may be
necessary to mechanically unlock your door. The mechanical key blade in
your intelligent access key can be used to open the driver’s door in this
situation. Refer to Remote Control in this chapter for more information
on the location and use of the mechanical key blade.
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
Your vehicle is equipped with two
intelligent access keys which operate
the power locks and the remote start
system. The key must be in the
vehicle to activate the push button
start system.
The intelligent access key also
contains a removable mechanical key
blade that can be used to unlock the
driver door. Slide the release on the
back of the transmitter to release the
mechanical key blade, then pull the
blade out.
Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys
were issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
56 Keys and Remote Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
1. Remove the backup key from the transmitter.
2. Twist a thin coin in the slot
hidden behind the backup key slot to
remove the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instruction inside the transmitter
for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to make
sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the
backup key.
Keys and Remote Control 57
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Memory Feature
This feature allows you to recall the driver seat, power mirrors and
power steering column (if equipped) memory positions.
Press the unlock button on the remote control or activate intelligent
access to recall memory. The seat, power mirrors and steering column
automatically move to the memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the ignition is switched out
of off (if easy entry feature is enabled).
Programming Memory To the Transmitter
To activate this feature:
1. Move the memory features to the desired positions using the
associated controls.
2. Press and hold button 1 for five seconds. A tone will
sound confirming memory position has been set. Continue to
hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
3. Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote control.
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press the unlock button on the remote control.
5. Repeat this procedure for memory 2 and another transmitter if
desired.
Deactivating Memory From the Transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button for five seconds. A tone will be
sound when the memory store is done. Continue to hold until a second
tone is heard.
2. Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control .
3. Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.
2
1
58 Keys and Remote Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will flash. It is recommended that this
method be used to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or turn the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
Your vehicle has remote start if the transmitter has this button.
The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. The transmitter has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is remote started. Refer to the Climate Control chapter
for more information. A manual climate control system will run at the
setting it was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
Keys and Remote Control 59
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• the feature has been disabled
• the hood is not closed
• two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last
hour
• the vehicle is not in P (Park)
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• the service engine soon light is on.
Remote Starting the Engine
Note: Each button press must be done within three seconds of each
other. The vehicle will not remote start if this sequence is not followed
and the horn will not chirp.
The label on your transmitter details
the starting procedure. To remote
start the engine:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps will flash
twice.
The horn will chirp if the system fails to start (unless quiet start is on).
Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. It
can be switched on or off. Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
Note: If the vehicle has been remote started you must press the
START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving the vehicle.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on the setting. Refer to the Information Displays
chapter to select the duration of the remote start system.
60 Keys and Remote Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Extending the Engine Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still running to extend the run
time for another remote start duration. If you programmed the duration
to last 10 minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin after what is left of
the first activation time. For example, if the vehicle had been running
from the first remote start for five minutes, the engine will continue to
run now for a total of 15 minutes. You can only extend the remote start
once.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after an engine
shutdown. Only two remote starts are allowed.
The ignition must be turned on and then back off or allow one hour to
pass before using remote start again if additional remote starts are
desired.
Turning the Engine Off After Remote Starting
Press the button once. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running engine.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the
information display. Refer to the Information Display chapter.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased
from your authorized dealer. Your dealer can program the transmitters to
your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. Refer to the
Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
Keys and Remote Control 61
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey威 allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. Any keys that have
not been programmed are referred to as an “administrator key” or
“admin key” which can be used to:
• create a restricted key
• program optional key settings
• clear the key feature altogether.
Once a key has been programmed you can access the following
information using the information display control:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.
• The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey.
When both a MyKey and an Admin Intelligent Access keys (fob) are
present, the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the
engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
• Belt-Minder威. This cannot be disabled and the five– minute timer does
not expire. The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt-Minder威 is
activated.
• Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed in the information display
control followed by an audible tone when the fuel tank is at 1/8 tank
or less.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on: Rear
parking aid, Blind spot information system (BLIS威) with cross traffic
alert, Lane departure warning, Satellite radio adult content restriction,
and Forward collision warning system.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or
changed afterword with an admin key.
• Vehicle speed limit of 65, 70, 75 and 80 mph (105, 113, 121 and
130 km/h). Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone
when vehicle speed has reached the selected top speed.
• Vehicle speed minder of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the
preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
62 MyKey
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message in the audio
system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
Also, Speed sensitive compensated volume (sscv) feature will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected you will not be able to disable
911 Assist, AdvanceTrac威 or Do not disturb feature.
CREATING A MYKEY姞
Use the information display control to create a MyKey威
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or, if the vehicle
is equipped with push button start, put the intelligent access key in
the backup slot; refer to Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information display controls and select
Settings, then MyKey威 by pressing OK or the > button.
4. Press OK to select Create.
5. When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message
informing you to label this key as a MyKey威. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
The key is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
To program optional settings for the key(s), refer to
Programming/Changing optional settings. If your vehicle is equipped
with remote start, refer to Using MyKey威 with remote start systems.
Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Note: All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in
which a key was programmed, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys. To clear all keys, refer to Clear all MyKeys威.
You can access the optional settings through the information display
control.
1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey威.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS姞
Note: All programmed MyKeys威 can be cleared within the same key
cycle in which a MyKey威 was created, otherwise an admin key is
required to clear the keys.
MyKey 63
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To clear all MyKeys威 as admin keys, use the information display control
to do the following:
1. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey威 .
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
The information display control displays information about keys
programmed to the vehicle:
• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when a restricted key is used. If
mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the key is not being
used by the intended user. The only way to reset this to zero is by
resetting the keys. If the mileage is lower than the last time you
checked, then the key system has been recently reset.
• # MYKEY(S): Indicates how many restricted keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect deletion of a restricted key.
• # ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how many admin keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect if an additional key has
been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY姞 WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey威 is NOT compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a
non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do
NOT make MyKey威 compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start
system, but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey威 functions.
Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. This makes it NOT compatible with
MyKey威. Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition
cylinder it may help you to retain some MyKey威 functions.
64 MyKey
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In addition to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey威,
owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to program
the non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey威 if the remote
start fob is used by the MyKey威 driver. To program a non-Ford-approved
remote start system as a MyKey威, do the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a non-Ford approved remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-5 in the Creating a MyKey威 section.
Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key (Push Button Start)
Note: It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey威
on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other
admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the system
will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have administrative
privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will identify the user
as an admin or MyKey威 driver depending on the settings of the actual
key used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey威 system
status menus may include the non-Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Checking system status
section.
For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved remote start installed, it is
possible to program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys威, in which case, you will
need to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys威 as admin keys
by doing the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your non-Ford-approved remote start
fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section.
MyKey 65
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MYKEY姞 TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot program a key • The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• The key in the ignition is the only admin key
(there always has to be at least one admin
key).
• The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push button start).
• SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey威 with
remote start systems.
I cannot program the
optional settings
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No keys are programmed to the vehicle.
Refer to Creating a MyKey威.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey with
remote start systems.
I cannot clear the
restricted keys
• Key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Creating a MyKey威.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey威 with
remote start systems.
I lost the only admin
key
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost a key • Program spare keys as outlined under
SecuriLock威 in the Security chapter.
66 MyKey
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Condition Potential Causes
I accidentally
programmed all keys
as restricted keys
• The vehicle has a remote start system that is
recognized as an admin key. Refer to the
Using MyKey威 with remote start systems
section to reset all restricted keys using
remote start.
No restricted key
functions with
intelligent access key
(push button start)
• An admin key is present at engine start-up.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Creating a MyKey威
Restricted key
programmed total
includes one additional
key
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as a restricted key.
• The vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. Refer to Using MyKey威 with remote
start systems.
Admin keys
programmed total
includes one additional
key
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as an admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. Refer to Using MyKey威 with remote
start systems.
MyKey威 miles do not
accumulate
• The restricted key is not being used by the
intended user.
• The key system has been reset.
MyKey 67
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control
The remote control can be used any time the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock all the doors.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed. The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote
control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver’s door will unlock all doors when
two-stage unlocking is disabled.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are
closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment is not closed, or if the
hood is not closed on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
A
B
68 Locks
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Power Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area
before using power liftgate control.
WARNING: Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Press twice within three seconds to open or close the liftgate,
or to reverse the movement.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of the vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull a front exterior door handle. The door will unlock and can be
opened.
Press and hold the door handle lock
sensor to lock the vehicle.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the liftgate
pull-cup handle.
Smart Unlocks
The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally
locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
Locks 69
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with the door open, vehicle in park and ignition off), after
you close the door the vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in
the passenger compartment. If an intelligent access key is found inside
the vehicle, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will
chirp, indicating that the intelligent access key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside the vehicle, you can lock your vehicle after
all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad, pressing the lock
button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking area on
the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. Refer to
SecuriCode™ Keyless Entry Keypad in this chapter for more
information on keyless entry keypad operation.
When you open one of the front doors and lock the vehicle using the
power door lock control, all doors will lock then doors if:
• the ignition is on, or
• the ignition is off and the vehicle is not in P (Park).
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature (If Enabled)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned off or to accessory.
70 Locks
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically
locked after the ignition is turned off and before the driver door is
opened.
Deactivating or Activating
Note: The autolock and autounlock features can be activated or
deactivated independently of each other.
These features can be activated or deactivated:
• through your authorized dealer
• by using the information display.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
illuminate when the intelligent access key or the keyless entry keypad is
used to unlock the vehicle.
The system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on
• the lock button on the remote control is pressed
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior dome lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
will illuminate when all doors are closed and the ignition is turned off.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse
• the START/STOP button is pressed.
Battery Saver
If the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or headlamps are left on, the battery
saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you shut off the engine and leave the ignition in the on or accessory
mode, the ignition will shut off after 30 minutes.
Locks 71
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Power Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
WARNING: Keep keys out of the reach of children. Do not allow
children to operate the power liftgate, or to play near to an open
or moving power liftgate.
Note: Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near
the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position. Make
sure that the liftgate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or a parking structure. The
liftgate or its components could be damaged.
Note: Do not drive with the liftgate open without first disabling the
power function and securing the liftgate to the vehicle.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40°F (-40°C), or on extreme
inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
The power liftgate can be enabled or disabled using the information
display. The remote control and instrument panel button will still operate
the liftgate regardless of the setting.
Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate
Note: The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second
press of the instrument panel, or the control button on the liftgate, or a
second double press of the transmitter button.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park).
72 Locks
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close. A
single chime indicates a problem with the close request, caused by:
• the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P (Park);
• or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage;
• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request, a fast
continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut
failure. See your authorized dealer if you still have a fast chime after the
load is removed.
To open or close from the instrument panel: Press the
instrument panel button.
To open or close with the remote control: Press the remote
control button twice within three seconds.
To open with the outside liftgate
control button:
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If the intelligent access transmitter (if
equipped) is within 3 feet (1 meter)
of the liftgate, the liftgate will unlock
when you press the liftgate release
button.
2. Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull-cup
handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the
control. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s
obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation.
To close with the rear cargo area control: Press and release
the button.
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Locks 73
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Obstacle Detection
When closing: The system will reverse to full open when it detects an
obstacle. A chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to reopen.
Remove the obstacle to close the liftgate.
Note: Entering the vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause the
vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, allow
the power liftgate to fully close before entering the vehicle. Before
driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar
message and/or warning indicator. Driving off without first checking for
the liftgate or door ajar message and/or warning indicator could result in
the liftgate being left open, unintentionally, while you are driving.
When opening: The system will stop and a chime will sound three times
when it detects an obstacle. Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate.
Resetting the Power Liftgate
The liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of
these conditions occur:
• a low voltage or dead battery
• disconnected battery
• the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched)
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then, reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the transmitter, or the instrument
panel control button.
Manual Operation
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with
the liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler, glass or
liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage to
the liftgate and its components.
74 Locks
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers.
To open the liftgate: Press the
button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, then pull on the outside
handle.
If the liftgate is not fully latched, you will receive a message information
display. Check the liftgate door to make sure it is fully latched.
In the event of a power failure, the latch can be accessed and released
from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
You can use the keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors
• recall memory features
• enable and disable autolock and autounlock
• program and erase user codes
• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5-digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Press the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds .
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered within
five seconds of each other.
Locks 75
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1•2 to store driver 1
settings or 3•4 to store driver 2 settings.
Note: Pressing 5•6, 7•8, or 9•0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not
recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry
code has been programmed.
You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ system (if equipped). Refer to the MyFord
Touch™ / MyLincoln Touch™ chapter.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold the 1•2 for two seconds. This must be done within five
seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5- digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if the wrong code has been
entered seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote control
• the ignition is turned on
• unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access.
76 Locks
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To unlock the driver’s door: enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: All doors will unlock if
the two-stage unlocking feature is disabled. Refer to Locking and
Unlocking earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors: enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3•4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors: press and hold 7•8 and 9•0 at the same time (with
the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
Locks 77
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It is designed to help
prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to
your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates
the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button
start systems, as well as a remote control.
If your intelligent access key is lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new
coded keys will need to be programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to
help prevent any inconveniences. See your authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
78 Security
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Keys
Note: A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to
your vehicle. You must take your vehicle and all access keys to your
authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed if you would like to
replace a previously programmed access key with a new access key, or if
you already have four access keys programmed to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside
the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily
accessible. See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed
if two previously programmed keys are not available.
Make sure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Make
sure that all doors are closed before beginning and that they remain
closed throughout the procedure. Perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if any steps are performed out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Place the new unprogrammed
intelligent access key, with the
buttons facing down, in the pocket
inside of the center console.
2. Press the driver or passenger
power door unlock control three
times.
3. Press and release the brake pedal
one time.
4. Press the driver or passenger
power door lock control three times.
5. Press and release the brake pedal one time. The indicator on the
START/STOP button should begin to rapidly flash, indicating the
programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent
access keys have been detected in the vehicle.
6. Press the START/STOP button within one minute. A message will
appear in the information display indicating that the new intelligent
access key was programmed.
7. Remove the intelligent access key from the center console pocket and
press the unlock button on the newly programmed intelligent access key
to exit programming mode.
Security 79
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. Verify that the remote entry functions operate (press lock then unlock,
making sure you end in unlock) and that the vehicle starts with new
intelligent access key.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps will flash and sound the horn up to a total of 10
times when:
• any door, the hood or the liftgate/trunk is opened without using the
keypad, the remote control or the intelligent access transmitter
• the ignition is turned on with an invalid key.
Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is
any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Lock the vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate
the alarm is in the pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in
20 seconds.
Once fully armed, any intelligent access keys found inside the vehicle are
disabled and will not start the engine. Press the unlock button to
re-enable them.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm, do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed
mode will.
• Press the unlock button on the remote control.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad.
• Enter the vehicle using intelligent access.
• Press the panic button on the remote control. The alarm system will
still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door and a message will appear in the information
display. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm using any of the
actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.
80 Security
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting In the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting In the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
Steering Wheel 81
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Use the control on the side of the
steering column to adjust the
position.
To adjust:
• tilt: use the top or bottom of the control
• telescope: use the front or rear of the control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column will move to the full up and in position when the ignition is
turned off and this feature is activated through the information display.
The column will return to the previous setting when the ignition is
turned on.
Memory Feature
The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled with the memory feature. Refer to the Seats
chapter.
Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the
operation. The column will respond to the adjustment control.
The steering column is designed to set a stopping position just short of
the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position will be set if the steering column
encounters an object while tilting.
To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control again after encountering the new
stopping position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column
position.
A new stopping position will be set. The steering column will stop just
short of the end of the column position the next time it is tilted.
82 Steering Wheel
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO CONTROL
SEEK: Press to select the next or
previous stored preset or track.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous frequency or seek through
a track.
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to scroll
through available audio modes.
MUTE: Press to silence the radio.
VOL (Volume): Press to increase or decrease the volume.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Phone mode
B. Voice recognition
Refer to the MyLincoln Touch™ chapter.
SEEK
M
E
D
IA
M
U
T
E
V
O
L
S
E
E
K
VOL
A
B
Steering Wheel 83
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
Type 2
Refer to the Cruise Control chapter for information on this feature.
SET
RES
CNCL
ON
OFF
GAP
84 Steering Wheel
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Refer to the Information Displays
chapter for more information.
Cluster Display Control Features
Use this control to adjust the right
side of the cluster display. Navigate
through the screen and press OK to
select. Refer to the MyLincoln
Touch™ chapter.
Steering Wheel 85
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.
Press the stalk down and release for
a single swipe of the wipers.
Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
The wiper speed will adjust with the vehicle speed when intermittent
wipe is selected. A faster vehicle speed will result in a shorter time
between wipes.
RAIN-SENSING WIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected
wiping or smearing. Lower the sensitivity, switch to normal or high-speed
wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing.
Note: Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity to one of the interval
moisture settings. The wipers will
not cycle until moisture is detected
on the windshield. The wiper speed
will vary based on the amount of
moisture detected on the windshield
and the sensitivity setting. The
wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected.
This feature can be turned on or off using the information display.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
interior mirror where the sensor is located, or sensor performance may
be affected.
2
1
0
2
1
0
86 Wipers and Washers
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
• A brief press causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid. This feature can be turned on and off in the information
display.
REAR-WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS
Rotate the control to select:
2 — Intermittent operation
(shortest pause between wipes).
1 — Intermittent operation (longest
pause between wipes).
0 — Off.
Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to
activate the rear washer. The control will return to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
The rear wiper will automatically turn on to intermittent when you shift
into R (Reverse) if the front wipers are activated. This feature may be
enabled or disabled in the information display.
2
1
0
2
1
0
Wipers and Washers 87
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Off
B. Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
C. Headlamps
High Beams
Push the lever forward to switch the
high beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the
high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull toward you slightly to activate and
release to deactivate.
88 Lighting
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: In severe weather conditions, it may be necessary to
switch your headlamps on manually.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
windshield wiper rainlamp feature. When the windshield wipers are
turned to low- or high-speed wiping during daylight, and the headlamp
control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn on after a
brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The headlamps will remain on for a
period of time after you switch the
ignition off. You can adjust the time
delay using the message center in
the instrument cluster. See
Information displays.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Press repeatedly or press and hold
until the desired level is reached.
Note: In the uplevel message center
only, a message will pop up that will
show incrementally where the
dimmer is in relation to the dimming
steps. These steps will also vary for
daytime and night time dimming.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer will set the illuminated components to the
maximum setting automatically.
Lighting 89
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off.
Follow the steps below to change the delay time (Steps 1 through 6 must
be done within 10 seconds):
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off position.
4. Turn the vehicle on and then turn the vehicle off.
5. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position (the headlights
should turn on).
6. Turn the lighting control to the off position when the desired delay
time (up to three minutes) has been reached.
Note: You can also adjust the time delay using the display controls in the
instrument cluster. See the Information Displays chapter.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk
or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output (vehicles
equipped with halogen headlamps) or turns the front fog lamps on
(vehicles equipped with HID headlamps) in low light situations.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off, autolamp or parking lamp
position.
3. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P.
4. Make sure the parking brake is disengaged.
90 Lighting
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The fog lamps can be turned on when the
lighting control is in the headlamps, parking
lamps or autolamps positions and the high
beams are not turned on.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (if equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel
which provides more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps
B. With adaptive headlamps
Note:
The system has a power-up movement check feature. When the
vehicle is started, the lamps track left to right, then back to center to alert
the driver that the system is working properly. There is a delay of two to
five seconds before the adaptive headlamp system will operate when the
vehicle is driven, as the system is inactive below 3 mph (5 km/h).
B
A
Lighting 91
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DIRECTION INDICATORS
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• Push down to activate the left turn
signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
• Push the lever again in either direction to manually cancel turn signal
operation.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash
only three times to indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamp control
Use to manually turn the dome lamp on.
• Press the control. This will turn on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights will
remain on until the control is pressed again.
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The front
row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is activated.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
92 Lighting
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Map/dome lamp (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is activated.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is off.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
Rear courtesy lamp
Located in the rear cargo area, the courtesy
lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
Lighting 93
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press or lift the switches to operate
the windows.
• Press the switch to the first
detent and hold to open the
window.
• Lift the switch to the first detent
and hold to close the window.
Rear Window Buffeting
You may hear a wind throb or buffeting noise when one or both of the
rear windows are open. This noise can be reduced by lowering a front
window approximately 2–3 inches (5–8 centimeters).
One-Touch Up or Down (Front Windows)
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Global Opening
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated to operate this feature.
Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control to begin opening
the front windows and venting the moonroof (if equipped). Release the
button once motion starts. The windows and moonroof will continue
opening.
Press the lock or unlock button on the remote control to stop motion.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
AUTO
AUTO
94 Windows and Mirrors
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you turn the
ignition off, or until either front door is opened.
Window Lock
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left-hand mirror
B. Off
C. Right-hand mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
A
B
B
A
C
Windows and Mirrors 95
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
Heated Exterior Mirror
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog when
the rear window defrost is activated.
Memory Mirrors
Mirror positions can be saved and recalled through the memory function.
Refer to the Seats chapter.
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver’s sideview mirror will automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when the
turn signal is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
96 Windows and Mirrors
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The approaching vehicle’s image is
small and near the inboard edge of
the main mirror when it is at a
distance. The image becomes larger
and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). Its image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B).
The vehicle will transition to your
peripheral field of view as it leaves
the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS姞) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) (If Equipped)
Refer to Blind Spot Information System (BLIS威) with Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA) in the Driving Aids chapter.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
A
B
C
Windows and Mirrors 97
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Slide-On-Rod
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Retract the visor before moving it
back toward the windshield and
storing it.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to switch on the lamp.
PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF™ AND POWER SUNSHADES
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista
Roof™ and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the
vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the panoramic Vista Roof™ and power
sunshade, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and
ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the
panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade opening.
98 Windows and Mirrors
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not attempt to move the sunshades manually or sunshade
damage or malfunction may occur. The sunshade track clips are designed
to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent damage to the
system. If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may just need to be
slid back into position to regain proper function. See your authorized
dealer for proper moonroof or sunshade operating, diagnostic or repair
instructions.
Note: If the moonroof is excessively operated, the glass and shade
motors will go into a fail-safe jog mode (manual intermittent operation)
to prevent overheating or damage to the motor. The motors will return to
normal operation after a period of idle time.
The moonroof and sunshade controls are located on the overhead
console.
The moonroof and sunshade have a one-touch open and close feature. To
stop motion during one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof
Note: The moonroof will only open after sunshades are completely open.
Press and release the control to
open the sunshade. The front and
rear sunshades open simultaneously.
Press and release the control to open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce rumbling wind noise which may
happen with the roof fully opened.
Press and release the control again to fully open.
Windows and Mirrors 99
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades
Note: The sunshades will only close after the moonroof is completely
closed.
Pull and release the control. The
moonroof will stop short of the fully
closed position. Pull the control
again and hold to fully close the
moonroof.
Pull and release the control to close the sunshades. The sunshades will
stop short of the fully closed position. Pull the control again and hold to
fully close the sunshades.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent the moonroof. Pull and hold
the TILT control to close the moonroof.
100 Windows and Mirrors
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Cluster shown in standard measure – metric clusters similar.
A. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
B. Speedometer
C. Infotainment display. SeeMyLincolnTouch™ for more information.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
These lights can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious
enough to cause expensive repairs. Many lights will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any light remains on after
starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light for
additional information.
Note: Some warning indicators are reconfigurable telltales (RTT). These
indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a
warning light, but do not display on startup.
Adaptive cruise control (if equipped) (RTT)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what
mode the system is in:
• On (gray light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is
turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
A B C
Instrument Cluster 101
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control
system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Airbag readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
continues to flash or remains on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-lock brake system
If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash, a
malfunction has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the
brake warning light also is illuminated.
Brake system warning light
To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on
position when the engine is not running, or in a position
between on and start, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition
is turned to the on position.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
102 Instrument Cluster
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Charging system (RTT)
Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Door ajar (RTT)
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine oil pressure (RTT)
Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range.
Engine coolant temperature (RTT)
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
Grade assist (if equipped) (RTT)
Illuminates when grade assist is turned on.
Heads up display (if equipped)
A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate momentarily when you
start your vehicle to make sure the display works.
High beams
Illuminates when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Low fuel (RTT)
Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty.
Instrument Cluster 103
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low tire pressure warning
Illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the light remains
on at start up or while driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn on or begins to flash, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Low washer fluid (RTT)
Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced power
Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Safety belt
Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威 chime
will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt.
Service engine soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
104 Instrument Cluster
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Speed control (if equipped) (RTT)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system is in:
• On (gray light–type 1 and type 2): Illuminates when the speed control
system is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
• Engaged (grey light-type 1, green light-type 2): Illuminates when the
speed control system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Instrument Cluster 105
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
106 Instrument Cluster
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that drivers
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and that you comply with all applicable laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit
a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting/messages.
The small squares in the upper right corner display the different menu
levels and how far in the menu levels you are.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you
can choose from the following categories:
Display Mode
Trip1&2
Information Displays 107
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel Economy
Settings
Information
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right
arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as
needed to exit back to the main menu.
Display Mode
Use the up/down arrow buttons to choose between the
following display options.
Display mode †Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 †Option 4
XXX mi (km) to empty X
Fuel gauge X X X X
Bar tachometer X X
Round tachometer X X
Engine coolant temp
gauge
X
Intelligent AWD X
Total odometer (lower
left corner)
XXXX
†You can also choose to have only the fuel gauge show in this mode. Refer
to Display > Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings section
later in this chapter.
Regardless of display mode chosen, when SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) is activated, the cluster will change to the round
tachometer if not already selected. After the round tachometer displays,
other display modes with the bar tachometer can also be chosen.
• XXX mi (km) to empty: Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel
tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic and can change (raise or
lower) depending on driving style.
108 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel
tank. The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or
on a grade. When the fuel level becomes low (50 miles [80 km] to
empty), the level indicator will change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low (0 miles [0 km] to empty), the level indicator
will change to red.
Note: When a MyKey威 is in use, low fuel warnings will display earlier.
The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
• Bar/Round tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top
of the scale may damage the engine. During SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
• Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will
be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off
the engine and let the engine cool.
• Intelligent AWD (if equipped): displays power distribution between the
front and rear wheels. More power to either front or rear wheels will
be displayed by more area filled in.
Trip1&2
Choose between the standard or enhanced trip display. See the
Settings chart following to reach the trip display settings.
Trip1&2 Standard display
Enhanced
display
Trip distance X X
Elapsed trip time X X
Average fuel economy X
Estimated amount of fuel consumed X
Total odometer (lower left corner)
Press OK to pause the Trip 1 or 2 screen. Press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance.
• Elapsed trip time— timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and
restarts when the vehicle is restarted.
Information Displays 109
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Estimated amount of fuel consumed — shows the amount of fuel used
for a given trip.
• Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and
restarts when the vehicle is restarted.
Fuel Economy
Use the left/right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel
economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst. Fuel
Economy
XX. Min Fuel
History
Instantaneous fuel usage x
†Fuel usage over a 5, 10, or
30 minute time span
x
Total odometer (lower left corner)
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed fuel usage
information.
†To configure the fuel usage time span, press the right arrow button
when in this screen.
• Inst. Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
•
XX. Min Fuel History: This display shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control On (default setting) / Off
Blind Spot On (default on key cycle) / Off
Collision Warning Sensitivity High / Normal / Low
Chimes On (default on key cycle) / Off
Warn On (default on key cycle) / Off
110 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driver Assist
Cross Traffic On (default on key cycle) / Off
Cruise Control Adaptive or Normal
Rear Park Aid On (default on key cycle) / Off
Trailer Sway On (default on key cycle) / Off
Vehicle
Autolamp Delay Off or number of seconds
Easy Entry/Exit On / Off
Fuel DTE Calculation Normal, Towing
Locks Autolock, On / Off
Autounlock On / Off
Remote
Unlocking
All doors / Driver’s door
Menu Control
Standard / Memory On (See Menu control later in
this section)
Oil Life Reset Set to XXX %
Power Liftgate Enable / Disable
Remote Start
Climate Control
(using this
feature allows
you to select
different climate
control modes
when the vehicle
is started using
the remote start
feature)
Heater – A/C Auto / Last
Settings
Steering Wheel Auto Heated /
Off
Front Defrost Auto / Off
Rear Defrost Auto / Off
Driver Seat Auto / Off
Passenger Seat Auto / Off
Duration 5 / 10 /15 minutes
Quiet Start On / Off
System Enable / Disable
Windows Remote Open On / Off
Information Displays 111
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle
Wipers
Courtesy Wipe On / Off
Rain Sensing On / Off
Reverse Wiper On / Off
*MyKey
Create MyKey Press and hold OK to create MyKey
911 Assist Always On / User Selectable
Traction Control Always On / User Selectable
Max Speed Choose desired speed or off
Speed Warning Choose desired speed or off
Volume Limiter On / Off
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Display
Gauge Display Fuel Gauge / Fuel + Tach
Trip Display Standard / Enhanced
Language
English / Español / Français
Units
Distance Miles & Gal / Km & Liters
Temperature Fahrenheit (°F) / Celsius (°C)
Restore Defaults
Hold OK to Restore Settings to Factory Defaults
Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information
and perform a system check.
112 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Warnings
XX Warnings Displays the number of warnings that need
immediate attention in amber. You can only view the
warnings form the System Check menu. View them
immediately by pressing OK and then OK again to
enter system check. Use the up/down arrows to
scroll through the warnings.
MyKey
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey)
System Check
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
Menu control
To change the menu control between Standard or Memory On, refer to
Vehicle > Menu Control found in the table under Settings in this
chapter.
• Standard: when in the Display, Trip or Fuel Economy sub-categories,
scrolling up and down will always exit back to the main categories.
• Memory on: when in the Display, Trip or Fuel Economy sub-categories,
scrolling up and down will display the previously selected
sub-categories.
Information Displays 113
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the OK button to acknowledge
and remove some messages from
the information display. Other
messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be
confirmed before you can access the
menus.
Message indicators: Some messages will be supplemented by a system
specific symbol.
Adaptive Cruise
Control Messages
Action / Description
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Displayed when a radar malfunction is
preventing the ACC from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Displayed when conditions exist such that the
adaptive cruise cannot function properly.
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
Displayed when the radar is blocked because
of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or
ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve.
AdvanceTrac威 /
Traction Control
Messages
Action / Description
Service AdvanceTrac Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威 system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Traction control off Displayed when the traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
Displayed when the trailer sway control has
detected trailer sway.
114 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Alarm/Security
Messages
Action / Description
To Stop Alarm, Start
Vehicle
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is
armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent
the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires.
AWD Messages Action / Description
AWD Off Displayed when the AWD system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself. This is
caused by operating the vehicle with the
compact spare tire installed or if the system is
overheating. The AWD system will resume
normal function and clear this message after
driving a short distance with the road tire
re-installed or after the system is allowed to
cool.
Check AWD Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle
Control/Transmission/AWD light when the AWD
system is not operating properly. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Information Displays 115
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Battery and
Charging System
Messages
Action / Description
Check Charging
System
Displayed when the charging system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Turn Power Off to
Save Battery
Displayed when the battery management
system determines that:
• the battery is at a low state of charge or,
• the ignition has been in accessory position
or on position with the engine off for
approximately 45 minutes.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to
protect the battery. This message will clear
once the vehicle has been started and the
battery state of charge has recovered. Turning
off unnecessary electrical loads will allow
faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Transport Mode
Contact Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
BLIS威 Messages Action / Description
Blind Spot Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
Displayed when the blind spot information
system/cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. Driver can typically clean the sensor
to resolve.
Blind Spot System
Fault
Displayed when a fault with the blind spot
information system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
Displayed when the blind spot information
system/cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. Driver can typically clean the sensor
to resolve.
116 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BLIS威 Messages Action / Description
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic
alert system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Vehicle Coming From
X
Displayed when the blind spot information
system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is
operating and senses a vehicle.
Brake System
Messages
Action / Description
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Check Brake System Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged Displayed when the parking brake is set, the
engine is running and the vehicle is driven
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning
stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Collision Warning
System Messages
Action / Description
Collision Warn Not
Available
Displayed when there is a system malfunction
with the collision warning system. The system
will be disabled. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warn Not
Available Sensor
Blocked
Displayed when the collision warning system
radar is blocked because of poor radar
visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water
in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Information Displays 117
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Collision Warning
System Messages
Action / Description
Collision Warning
Malfunction
Displayed when there is a system malfunction
with the collision warning system. The system
will be disabled. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Display Fault
Displayed when there is a system malfunction
with the collision warning system display.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Door Messages Action / Description
X Door Ajar Displayed when a door is not completely
closed.
Liftgate Ajar Displayed when the liftgate is not completely
closed.
Fuel Messages Action / Description
Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be
properly closed.
Fuel Level Low XXX
mi/km to E
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
118 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Keys and Intelligent
Access Messages
Action / Description
No Key Detected Displayed if the intelligent access key is not
detected by the system in the following three
scenarios:
•When the start/stop button is pressed in an
attempt to either start the engine or cycle
through the ignition states.
•When the engine is running and a door is
opened then closed.
•When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph
(16 km/h) for the first time after starting.
Key Programmed x
Keys Total
Displayed during spare key programming,
when an intelligent access key is programmed
to the system.
Max Number of Keys
Programmed
Displayed during spare key programming when
the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
Press Brake to Start Displayed when the start/stop button is
pressed without the brake pedal being applied.
This is a reminder that the brake pedal must
be applied when the start/stop button is
pressed in order to start the engine.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Displayed when the start/stop button is
pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent
Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle.
Accessory Power
Active
Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory
ignition state.
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a
problem with your vehicle’s starting system.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Information Displays 119
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
LOW Engine Oil
Pressure
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible,
turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with
your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil
Soon
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is
10% or less.
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
Engine Coolant Over
Temp
Displayed when the engine coolant
temperature is excessively high.
Washer Fluid Level
Low
Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than
one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level.
Steering Malfunction
Service Now
Displays when the steering system needs
service. See your authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
Power Steering Assist
Fault
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
MyKey威 Messages Action / Description
MyKey active Drive
Safely
Displayed when MyKey威 is active.
MyKey not Created Displayed during key programming when
MyKey威 cannot be programmed.
120 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey威 Messages Action / Description
Speed Limited to xx
MPH/km/h
Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on.
Vehicle Near MyKey
Top Speed
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle Near MyKey
Top Speed
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Check Speed Drive
Safely
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
a preselected speed.
Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and
Belt-Minder威 is activated.
Could Not Program
Key
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
Check Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Check Rear Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the rear park aid status.
Information Displays 121
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Passenger Sensing
System Message
Action / Description
Remove Objects Near
Passenger Seat
Displayed when objects are by the passenger
seat. After the objects are moved away from
the seat, if the warning stays on or continues
to come on contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Reminder Messages Action / Description
Steering Lock Turn
Wheel to Unlock
Displays when you need to turn the steering
wheel in order to disengage the steering lock.
Shift to Park Displayed when the engine is turned off and
shift select lever is in any position other than
P (Park).
Tire Messages Action / Description
Low Tire Pressure Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions, refer to Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Wheels and tires chapter . If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
122 Information Displays
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance/Strength The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result the audio
system muting.
CD/CD Player Information
Note: CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function
correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Note: CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified
with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint
pens may damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only, wiping from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Audio System 123
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files are played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in
the current folder.
124 Audio System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyLincoln TOUCH™ SYSTEM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Most of the audio features are controlled through the MyLincoln
Touch™ system. Refer to the MyLincoln Touch™ chapter for more
information.
SEEK
VOL
TUNE
BA C D
F E
Audio System 125
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
A. Seek/Reverse/Fast
Forward
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press one of the seek buttons. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use the SEEK
buttons find to the previous or next channel
in the selected category.
In CD mode, select the previous or next
track.
B. Eject Eject a CD.
C. CD Slot Insert a CD.
D. TUNE +/TUNE - In radio mode, you can search the frequency
band in individual increments.
In SIRIUS mode, you can find the next or
previous available SIRIUS satellite station.
E. Volume Press the right or left side to adjust the
volume up or down.
F. Power Press the power control to turn the system on
and off.
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located behind a small access door in the instrument
panel and has the following features:
A. A/V inputs
B. SD card slot
C. USB ports
For more information, refer to the MyLincoln Touch™ material.
C
B
A
126 Audio System
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Refer to Menu features in the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
chapter.
A. MyTemp: Allows you to quickly adjust to a frequently used setting
with a single touch.
Press + and - to increase and decrease the temperature.
Touch and hold MyTemp to save the current temperature. To access the
setting again, touch the MyTouch indicator again.
B. Fan speed control: Slide your finger over the rear slider area to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
C. DUAL: Allows the passenger to set their temperature independent of
the driver temperature.
D. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected
or can be turned on manually in any airflow mode except Defrost.
E. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
D
GJ I H
B
F E
CA
Climate Control 127
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
F. A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. Air
conditioning cools the vehicle using outside air. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes.
Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: A/C turns on automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
G. Power: Press to turn the system on and off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
H. AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select
the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
automatically determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the
selected temperature.
I. Rear defrost: Turns the heated rear window on and off. Refer to
Heated rear window later in this chapter for more information. If your
vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button turns them on also.
J. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
de-mister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve
clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position to continue
to receive cool air from your A/C system.
128 Climate Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in manual override control:
1. Choose Panel, A/C, and recirculation controls.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Defrost or Floor/Defrost mode. To maximize performance
select Defrost.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Note: The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 15 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after 15 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in
front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the
concentration of airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the
air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration
system gives the following benefits to customers:
• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits
For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace
the cabin air filter, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance chapter.
Climate Control 129
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an
authorized dealer.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote
start.
You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation. Turn the
ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can now
make adjustments. You will need to turn certain vehicle-dependent
features back on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Rear defroster.
You can adjust the settings using the information display controls. See
the Information Displays chapter.
Automatic Climate Systems
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). Cooled seats are set to
high (if available and selected to AUTO in the message center).
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated/cooled seats are
not automatically turned on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are
set to high (if available and selected to AUTO in the message center).
The rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned on.
130 Climate Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system,
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a collision.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 mm) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Seats 131
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Front seat and rear seat outboard head restraints
Note: The center rear head restraint
is fixed and non-adjustable. The
head restraint consist of a trimmed
foam covering over the upper
structure of the seatback.
The head restraints consist of :
A. An energy absorbing head restraint
B. Two steel stems
C. Guide sleeve unlock/remove button
D. Guide sleeve adjust/release button
A
C
B
D
132 Seats
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Before adjusting any head restraint, adjust the seatback to an
upright driving/riding position. Properly adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
• Raise: Pull up on the head restraint (A).
• Lower: Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust/release button (D) and
push down on the head restraint (A).
• Remove: Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest
adjustment position and then press and hold both the adjust/release
button (D) and the unlock/remove button (C), then pull up on the
head restraint.
• Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the
head restraint down until it locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (if equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To
tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding
position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head
to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
Seats 133
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
Power lumbar
134 Seats
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MEMORY FUNCTION
The memory control, located on the instrument panel, allows
automatic positioning of the driver seat, power mirrors and
power tilt/telescopic steering column (if equipped) to two
programmable positions.
Programming a memory position
Note: A memory position may be programmed at any time.
• To program position 1, move the memory features to the desired
positions using the associated controls. Press and hold button 1 for at
least two seconds. A chime will sound confirming that a memory
position has been set.
• To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
Recalling a memory position
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is on.
Press the desired memory control to recall a memory position.
Recalling a memory position with the remote control
The memory positions are also recalled when you press unlock on your
remote control (if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position)
or, when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a
memory position. If the easy entry feature is enabled, the seat will first
move to the easy entry position. The seat will move to the final position
when the key is in the ignition or when the push button start system is
put in accessory mode/started.
To program the memory feature to a remote control, refer to Keys and
remote control.
2
1
Seats 135
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Easy entry/exit feature
This feature automatically moves the steering wheel all the way up and
in and moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 in. (5 cm) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is turned off
The seat and steering wheel will move to the original position when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is put in accessory mode/started
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to the Information Displa ys chapter.
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
136 Seats
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various
cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Heated and cooled seat air filter replacement (if equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to Scheduled maintenance information.
The filters are located under each front seat and can be accessed from
the 2nd row foot-well area. Move the front seats all the way forward and
to the full up positions to ease access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate toward the
front of the vehicle once tabs are
released, then remove the filter.
A/C
Seats 137
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips into
position.
REAR SEATS
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when folding
the seatback.
• Recline Seatback : With the seat occupied,
pull the lever up to recline the seatback.
• Fold Seatback: With the seat empty, pull the
lever up to fold the seatback forward.
• Unfold Seatback: Rotate the seatback
upward until the seatback latches in the
upright position. The seatback will click when
it is locked into position.
EasyFold™ folding seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it
down. Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to
the seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and
the liftgate has been open for less than 10 minutes.
The control buttons are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
138 Seats
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Fold Seatback: Press and hold the control
mechanism to lower the seatback. The top portion
lowers the right (40%) seatback, and the bottom
portion lowers the left (60%) seatback..
• Unfold Seatback: Rotate the seatback upward until
the seatback latches in the upright position. The
seatback will click when it is locked into position.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
Press the latch and pull the armrest
forward for armrest/cupholder use.
LEFT
RIGHT
Seats 139
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To access the cup holders, lift up one of
the slotted areas on the cover.
To close the armrest, close the cupholder cover and rotate the armrest
rearward until the latch clicks.
Rear heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels.
140 Seats
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on. To operate the
heated seats:
• Press the indicated side of the control for maximum
heat.
• Press again to deactivate.
• Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat.
• Press again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
Seats 141
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use
in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks, and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
142 Universal Garage Door Opener
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Hold the garage door hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in. (2–8 cm) away
from the button you want to
program.
Note: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may stop
transmitting. If this occurs press and
hold the function button while you press and release the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds. The indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly once the radio frequency signal is accepted.
3. Press and hold both buttons until the indicator light changes from
flashing slowly to rapidly, then release.
4. Press and hold the function button you programmed for 5 seconds,
then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your
garage door does not operate, observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed button to activate the door.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds than turns to a
constant light, follow the steps
below.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
1. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the next step.
2. Return to your car.
3. Press and hold the function
button for 2 seconds, then release.
Repeat this step. Depending on the
brand of garage door opener you
may do repeat this sequence a third
time.
To program additional buttons repeat steps one through four.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Universal Garage Door Opener 143
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You can not erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons
flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash,
release the buttons. The codes for
all buttons are erased.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming HomeLink姞 to a Genie Intellicode姞 2 garage door
opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2威 transmitter must already be programmed
to operate with the garage door opener.
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink威 to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this
A. Red LED
B. Green LED
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the transmitter for 10 seconds.
The LED light will change from green to green and red.
BA
144 Universal Garage Door Opener
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) of the HomeLink威
button.
4. Press and hold the both the programmed Genie button and the
HomeLink威 button you want to program. The HomeLink威 LED will flash
rapidly when the programming is successful.
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If
HomeLink威 does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter
will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays
green and red, release the button until the LED turns off before pressing
the button again.
Once HomeLink威 has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button for
10 seconds. The LED will change from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.
Programming HomeLink姞 to the Genie Intellicode姞 garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink威 to the
garage door opener motor.
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the Garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.
3. Press and release the program
button. The larger purple LED will
flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode威 2 transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both LED’s on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
Universal Garage Door Opener 145
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Press and hold the previously programmed HomeLink威 button for two
seconds. Repeat this step up to three times until the garage door moves.
At this point programming is complete.
Clearing a HomeLink姞 device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink威 buttons press and hold
the two outer HomeLink威 buttons until the indicator light begins to flash.
The led will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both
buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the
led should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any
of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
146 Universal Garage Door Opener
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter can cause
damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Auxiliary power points may be found:
• on the passenger side of the center console near the instrument panel
• in the center console storage compartment
• on the rear of the center console
• on the left rear quarter panel, accessible from the liftgate or behind
the rear seat.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
Do not use the power point(s) over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts
DC/180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point and to avoid
discharge of the battery. To prevent the battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Auxiliary Power Points 147
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features.
A. Cupholders
B. Utility compartment with in-bin
powerpoint, removable coin holder,
removable storage tray and
intelligent access key slot.
C. Rear powerpoint
D. An individual latch will either
open the entire armrest to access
the utility compartment or allow
each armrest to slide separately.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your
option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.
A
B
C
D
148 Storage Compartments
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 km) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting your engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
IGNITION
1. Off – Press and release the start button without applying the brake
pedal when your vehicle is in on mode or when the engine is running,
and there is no vehicle speed. This position shuts the engine and all
electrical accessories off.
Note: In order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion,
press and hold the start button for approximately one second or press
the start button three times within two seconds. Then, shift to neutral
and use the brakes to bring the vehicle to a safe stop. After the vehicle
has stopped, turn the engine off and shift to park.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 149
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Accessory– Press and release the start button without applying the
brake pedal. This allows electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
3. On – Press and release the start button once from accessory mode or
twice from off without applying the brake pedal. This will power your
vehicle’s electrical system and the warning lights in the instrument
cluster will illuminate, but the engine will remain off.
4. Start – Press the start button (for any length of time) while applying
the brake pedal. This cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
WARNING: The keyless starting system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile
phones.
Note: A valid passive key must be located inside the vehicle to switch
the ignition on and start the engine.
To turn the ignition on, press the start button once. It
is located on the instrument panel to the right of the
steering wheel. All electrical circuits and accessories are
operational, and warning lamps and indicators will
illuminate.
To start the vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure the transmission is in P (Park).
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
3. Press the start button.
To turn the ignition off, press the start button when the vehicle is on or
the engine is running.
The passive starting system will not function if:
• the passive key frequencies are jammed.
• the passive key battery is dead.
START
STOP
ENGINE
150 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following.
1. Locate the key backup slot at the
front of the center console storage
compartment.
2. Insert the passive key into the key
holder.
3. With the passive key in this
position, you can use the start button
to switch the ignition on and start
your vehicle.
To stop the engine with the vehicle stationary, do the following:
1. Move the gearshift lever to P (Park).
2. Press the start button.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators
will be switched off.
To stop the engine when the vehicle is moving, do the following:
1. Press and hold the start button for at least one second or press the
start button three times within two seconds.
2. Shift to neutral and use the brakes to bring the vehicle to a safe stop.
3. After the vehicle has stopped, turn the engine off and shift into park.
WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still
moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not be locked, but higher effort will be required. When the
ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, warning lights and
indicators may also be off.
The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within
20 seconds of switching the vehicle off, if a valid passive key is not
present. Apply the brake pedal and press the start button for up to
20 seconds. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no longer start your
vehicle without the passive key present inside the vehicle.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 151
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Once the vehicle has started, the vehicle will remain running until being
turned off by the start button, even if the passive key is no longer found
in the vehicle. Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the
vehicle is running, the system will search for a passive key inside the
vehicle. If the passive key is no longer present in the vehicle, you will not
be able to restart your vehicle outside of the fast restart time.
Your vehicle may have remote start capability. Refer to Remote start in
the Keys and Remote Control chapter.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
• Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
3. Press the start button. The engine may continue cranking for up to
15 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, wait for a short period
of time and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this flooded engine procedure.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.
152 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 153
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure the vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It will achieve maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. If you use the heater longer
than three hours, this will not improve system performance and will use
unnecessary electricity.
154 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel
system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not
be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
Fuel and Refueling 155
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission
control system. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Octane Recommendations
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer
fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
156 Fuel and Refueling
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning lamps and
indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with the
capless fuel system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
Fuel and Refueling 157
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire
compartment.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel
system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of
the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
158 Fuel and Refueling
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Easy Fuel姞 “No Cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping. Pump fuel as
normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, wait about five seconds before slowly
removing the fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into
the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to close
properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.
Fuel and Refueling 159
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,200 km–4,800
km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
160 Fuel and Refueling
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Fuel and Refueling 161
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted
to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the
Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized
dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel威
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
162 Fuel and Refueling
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 163
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel
usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as
a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six. The automatic transmission shift
strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and
will provide a limited amount of grade assist features automatically.
P
R
N
D
S
164 Transmission
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
S (Sport)
Moving the gearshift lever to S (Sport):
• Provides additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase engine RPM during engine
braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle
acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
• Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Note: The system will stay in S (Sport) until the gear shift lever is
moved into another gear for example P (park) or D (Drive).
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (if equipped)
Your transmission must be in S (Sport) for SelectShift to operate
properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with the +/– buttons on the side of your
gearshift lever:
• Press (–) on the gearshift lever
button to manually downshift the
transmission.
• Press (+) on the gearshift lever
button to manually upshift the
transmission.
If your vehicle is equipped with paddles on the steering wheel:
• Pull the left paddle(–)to
downshift the transmission.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift
the transmission.
Transmission 165
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following
chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel
economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 - 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 - 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 - 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 - 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
The instrument cluster will show the selected gear you are currently in.
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts
if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. It will still
allow you to downshift at any time as long as SelectShift determines that
the engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
Automatic transmission adaptive learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will
not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Brake-shift interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
166 Transmission
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Use the BSI lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead
battery.
Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
1. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), carefully pry off and remove
the Brake shift interlock access
panel.
2. Locate the brake shift interlock lever in front of the
shifter assembly.
3. Apply the brake pedal. Gently push and hold the
brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift
lever out of the P (Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Install the trim panel.
5. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is
used.
Transmission 167
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active,
the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
Note: This feature will not operate if the parking brake is activated.
Hill start assist keeps your vehicle stationary long enough to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when your vehicle is
on a slope.
The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed
sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is
an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car park
ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
168 Transmission
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
Transmission 169
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING YOUR ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles cannot. The AWD system is active
all the time and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present, the warning Check AWD
will display in the message center. The AWD system is not functioning
correctly and defaulted to front-wheel drive. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD Off message may also be displayed in the message
center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front-wheel
drive. This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume
normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has
been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled, the AWD Off
message will turn off and normal AWD function will return. The AWD Off
message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. If the mini-spare tire
is installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This
condition may be indicated by an AWD Off message in the information
display. If there is an AWD Off message in the message center from using
the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired
or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system.
DRIVING IN SPECIAL CONDITIONS WITH AWD
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different
from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
170 All-Wheel Drive
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside
temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Lower gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic Operating Principles in Special Conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
All-Wheel Drive 171
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac威 with Roll
Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of
time. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. After the system has
cooled down, normal AWD function will return. When driving at slow
speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use L (Low) gear
when possible. L (Low) gear operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.
172 All-Wheel Drive
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs
(for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (power transfer unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest
Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
All-Wheel Drive 173
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A
danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are
on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of
an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power
will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application and
brake overheating. Do not descend in
neutral; instead, disengage overdrive
or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
174 All-Wheel Drive
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it
more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford
Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
off-highway usage.
All-Wheel Drive 175
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter for
wheel cleaning instructions.
Refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to P
(Park) and apply the parking brake, and then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the
rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can
reduce stopping distances in critical situations.
176 Brakes
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The ABS lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start up,
remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need
to be serviced.
If the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released,
have your brake system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangers inherent when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down to its
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down again.
Brakes 177
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or mud), turning the traction
control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full
engine power. Turn off the traction control system using the information
display control. Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled using
the information display control. If the stability control light still
illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
178 Traction Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) system helps you
keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic
stability control (ESC) portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral
slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The traction
control system (TCS) helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
(For details on TCS operation, see the Traction Control chapter.)
Stability Control 179
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 skidding off its intended
route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
USING ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH RSC姞
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. The
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system cannot be completely turned off, but
the ESC and RSC威 portions of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in R (Reverse). The traction control portion of the system
can be turned off independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
180 Stability Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the
system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
Parking Aids 181
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The system can be turned off using the information display control. Refer
to the Information Display chapter. If a fault is present in the system, a
warning message appears in the information display and does not allow
the driver to switch the faulted system on.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey威, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
A
182 Parking Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper
or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the
liftgate.
Parking Aids 183
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object (i.e. a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the liftgate is ajar, no
rear view camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the
following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R
(Reverse):
1. Menu
2. Vehicle
3. Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch screen shows a preview of the
feature(s) selected.
184 Parking Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if Fixed guidelines are on.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to
your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects are
getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the
yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green highlights which appear on top of
the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing
system. The alert highlights the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled,
highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.
A
E
D
C
B
Parking Aids 185
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind the
vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown.
Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle.
The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a
reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R
(Reverse), When the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse), the
feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature are OFF, Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3.
Press the up and down arrows to change the view. The selection level
appears between the buttons (i.e. Level 1). The default setting for the
manual zoom is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the
vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.
186 Parking Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if the vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching On Cruise Control
Press the ON control up and release.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press the SET control upward and release.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.
Cruise Control 187
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
• Press SET up or down and hold to increase or decrease the set speed.
Release the control when you reach the desired speed.
• Press SET up or down and release. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press SET up and release.
Canceling a Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased.
Resuming a Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Off Cruise Control
Note: The set speed is erased when you switch off cruise control.
Press the OFF control down and release or turn off the ignition.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road
conditions, especially when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving. Failing to
follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, adaptive cruise control will not
detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when
entering or leaving a highway, in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
188 Cruise Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, rain,
spray or snow.
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
The system is designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a
proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same
lane. The driver can select from one of four GAP settings, the controls
are located on the steering wheel.
At startup, the system sets the gap to the last selected setting. Once
activated, the driver can deactivate the system at any time by pressing
the brake pedal, pressing the steering wheel ON/OFF control or pressing
the RES/CNCL control. In addition, the driver can temporarily increase
the vehicle speed above the current speed by manually pressing on the
accelerator pedal.
The controls for using your cruise
control are located on the steering
wheel.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
1. Press and release ON.
The information display will show
the gray indicator light, current gap
setting and SET.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press SET upward and release. The vehicle speed will be stored in the
memory.
SET
RES
CNCL
ON
OFF
GAP
Cruise Control 189
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The information display will show a green indicator light,
current gap setting and desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. A lead vehicle graphic will
illuminate if there is a vehicle
detected in front of you.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle in front of you, the vehicle
will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a collision,
serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by
the adaptive cruise control system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is
ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated.
The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead
until:
• the vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed
• the vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view
• the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (26 km/h)
• a new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. The maximum braking
which is applied by the system is limited and can be overridden by the
driver applying the brakes.
190 Cruise Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, an audible warning will sound while the system continues to
brake. This is accompanied by a heads-up display; a red warning bar
illuminating on the windshield. The driver should take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the
driving conditions.
The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you can
be decreased or increased by
pressing the GAP control up or
down. The selected gap will be
displayed in the message center as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
Graphic
display (bars
between
vehicles)
Following
distance
Following
distance at
60 mph
(100 km/h)
Dynamic
behavior
1 bar 1 second 29 yards (28 m) Sporty
2 bars 1.5 seconds 44 yards (42 m) Normal
3 bars 1.9 seconds 56 yards (53 m) Normal
4 bars 2.3 seconds 66 yards (64 m) Comfort
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the last chosen gap for the current
driver will be automatically selected.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL to disengage the system. The last
set speed will be displayed with a strikethrough.
Disengaging the system will not erase your previous set speed.
Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING: Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
pressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Cruise Control 191
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When the driver is overriding the system, the green indicator
light is illuminated, and the follow vehicle is not shown in the
information display. The system will resume operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed will decrease to the set
speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
There are three ways to change the set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press SET upward and
release.
• Increase or decrease the speed by holding SET upward or downward
until the desired set speed is shown on the information display. The
vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph (2 km/h) by
briefly pressing the SET upward or downward.
The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new
set speed. The set speed will display continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Resume should only be used if the driver is aware of the set speed
and intends to return to it.
Press and release RES/CNCL. The vehicle will return to the previously
set speed. The set speed will display continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle speeds below 16 mph (26 km/h).
An audible alarm will sound and the automatic braking will be released if
the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and the system will shut down if it is
applying brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to
cool down. The system will function normally again when the brakes
have cooled down.
192 Cruise Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
You should select a lower gear position when the system is active in
situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades (i.e.,
driving in mountainous areas). Additional engine braking is needed in
these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Switching Off Adaptive Cruise Control
Note: The set speed memory is erased when you turn off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.
Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. It may not detect vehicles
at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead
vehicle graphic will not illuminate if a vehicle is not detected in front of
you.
Detection issues can occur:
A. When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
B. With vehicles that edge into your
lane. These vehicles can only be
detected once they have moved fully
into your lane.
C. There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver
should stay alert and intervene when necessary.
Cruise Control 193
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, the radar sensing zone
may be altered causing missed or false vehicle detections. See your
authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and
operation.
Adaptive Cruise Control Not Available
Several conditions exist which can cause the system to deactivate or
prevent the system from activating when requested. These conditions
include:
• a blocked sensor
• high brake temperature
• a failure in the system or a related system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNING: Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly
when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled.
Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use tires sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect the normal operation of
ACC. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
A message regarding a blocked sensor
is displayed if the radar signals from
the sensor have been obstructed. The
sensor is located behind a fascia cover
near the driver side of the lower grille.
A vehicle ahead cannot be detected
and the system will not function when
the radar signals are obstructed. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being
displayed.
194 Cruise Control
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these condition
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these condition
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions.
Desert / remote area with no other
vehicles and no roadside objects
Wait a short time or switch to
normal cruise control.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage
warning and not be blocked. This can happen, for example, when driving
in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition will
either self clear or clear after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower
vehicles. Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise
control through the information display.
The cruise control indicator light will replace the adaptive
cruise control indicator light if normal cruise control is selected.
The gap setting will not be displayed, the system will not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be
activated. The system will default to adaptive cruise control when the
engine is started.
Cruise Control 195
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS姞) WITH CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS威 as a
replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS威 is not a
replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
BLIS威 aids the driver in detecting
vehicles that may have entered the
blind spot zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately
10 feet (3 meters) beyond the
bumper. The system alerts you if
certain vehicles enter the blind spot
zone while driving.
BLIS威 aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the
blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The system alerts you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: BLIS威 is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or
objects; or to detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure
(fences, guardrails, trees, etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
196 Driving Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone (typically
fewer than two seconds), the system does not trigger.
Using the Systems
BLIS威 turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven
forward above 3 mph (5 km/h); it remains on while the transmission is in
D (Drive) and N (Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the
system enters CTA mode. Once shifted back into D (Drive), BLIS威 turns
back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: BLIS威 does not function in R (Reverse) or P (Park) or provide
any additional warning when a turn signal is on.
CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet (14 meters) away
though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked. Reversing
slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA
system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior
mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone
coverage is nearly maximized.
Driving Aids 197
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the
left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely
limited.
System Lights and Messages
The BLIS威 and CTA systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in
the outside mirror on the side of the
vehicle the approaching vehicle is
coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when the headlamp switch is not in the
off position and nighttime darkness is detected.
CTA also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own series
of tones; see the Parking Aids chapter.
198 Driving Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Sensors
WARNING: Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked
condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS威 as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS威 is not a replacement for
careful driving and only an assist.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present;
this is rare and known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked
condition either self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
The system uses radar sensors
which are located behind the
bumper fascia on each side of the
vehicle. Do not allow these areas to
become obstructed by mud, snow or
bumper stickers, as this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded performance condition, BLIND SPOT
NOT AVAILABLE,orCROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE appear in
the information display and the alert indicator illuminates in the
appropriate mirror(s). The information display warning can be cleared
but the alert indicator remains illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the system can be reset in two ways: 1)
when at least two objects are detected while driving, or 2) turn the
ignition key from on to off, then back on. If the blockage is still present
after the key cycle, the system senses again that it is blocked after
driving in traffic.
Driving Aids 199
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reasons for messages being displayed
The radar surface is
dirty or obstructed
Clean the fascia area in front of the radar or
remove the obstruction.
The radar surface is
not dirty or obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to
allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it
can clear the blocked state.
Heavy rainfall/snowfall
interferes with the
radar signals
No action required. The system automatically
resets to an unblocked state once the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops. Do
not use BLIS威 and/or CTA in these conditions.
System Limitations
The BLIS威 and CTA systems do have their limitations; situations such as
severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS威:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may limit the CTA system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors detect may detect the trailer,
causing a false alert. You may want to turn the BLIS威 off if the false
alerts become annoying.
There may be certain instances when either the BLIS威 or CTA systems
illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is
known as a false alert. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
200 Driving Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the BLIS威
indicator illuminates and remains on and BLIND SPOT SYSTEM
FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT appears in the
information display. When problems that may cause the left or right
indicator not to illuminate, only the information display faults appear.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the
information display control; refer to the Information Display chapter.
When the BLIS威 is switched off, the driver does not receive alerts and
the information display shows BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and/or CTA
SYSTEM OFF. The system switches back on whenever the ignition is
switched on.
One or both systems can also be switched off permanently at your
authorized dealer. Once switched off, switching it back on must also be
done at the dealership. When switched off, the information display shows
BLIND SPOT DISABLED and/or CTA DISABLED.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid. It is not intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure to press the brake pedal to
activate the brakes may result in a collision.
WARNING: The collision warning system with brake support
cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or respond to potential
collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active at speeds above
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
Driving Aids 201
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
This system is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. A
radar detects if your vehicle is rapidly
approaching another vehicle traveling
in the same direction as yours.
If it is, a red warning light
illuminates and an audible warning
chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed
by charging the brakes. If the risk of collision further increases after the
warning light illuminates, the brake support prepares the brake system for
rapid braking. This may be apparent to the driver. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full
force braking is applied even if the brake pedal is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING: The collision warning system’s brake support can
only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
The warning system and chime can be turned on and off separately; the
warning system sensitivity can be adjusted to one of three possible
settings by using the information display control. Refer to the
Information Displays chapter.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off in a vehicle equipped with
MyKey威, refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or
disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system
warnings. Refer to the Information Displays chapter for instructions on
reducing the sensitivity.
202 Driving Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Blocked Sensors
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor appears in the information
display, the radar signals from the
sensor have been obstructed. The
sensors are located behind a fascia
cover near the driver side of the lower
grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning
system does not function. The
following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being
displayed.
Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is
interfering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision
warning should automatically
reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
The collision warning system is
temporarily disabled. Collision
warning should automatically
reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve.
Driving Aids 203
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Limitations
WARNING: The collision warning system’s brake support can
only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
where vehicles do not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements are large (very active driving
style).
• High interior temperatures, which may deactivate the illumination or
the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces (audible
warning still sounds).
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility of the warning lamp;
therefore, it is recommended to keep the audible warning on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, the radar sensing zone
may be altered causing missed or false collision warnings. See your
authorized dealer to have your collision warning radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
204 Driving Aids
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than three to five seconds while the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid
reservoir level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven, steering efforts may be caused by low power
steering pump fluid level. Check for a low power steering pump fluid
level before seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering reservoir above the MAX mark, as this
may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off),
you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire.
• uneven tire wear.
• loose or worn suspension components.
• loose or worn steering components.
• improper steering alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
Driving Aids 205
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CARGO NETS
WARNING: This net is not designed to restrain objects during a
collision or heavy braking.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area.
Attach the net to the anchors provided in one of the two configurations.
Repeat the attachment on both sides of the vehicle.
Type 1
206 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Type 2
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The system is located in the floor of
the cargo area. Lift the release handle
to open.
Load Carrying 207
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: When loading the roof rail crossbars, it is
recommended to evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a
low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Note: The maximum recommended load is 100 pounds (45 kilograms),
evenly distributed on the crossbars.
Note: Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel. The roof
panel is not designed to directly carry a load.
For proper function of the roof rack system, loads must be placed
directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your vehicle may
be equipped with factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine Accessory
crossbars, designed specifically for your vehicle, are also recommended
for use with your roof rack system.
Ensure that the load is securely fastened. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
208 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILITY HOOK
The utility hook can be used to
hang small items such as grocery
bags, etc. Do not hang more than
10 pounds (4.5 kilograms) on the
hook.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Load Carrying 209
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
210 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Example only:
Load Carrying 211
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
212 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
• Example only:
Load Carrying 213
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
214 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
Load Carrying 215
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you
have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the
vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb.
(45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x
100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
216 Load Carrying
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Turning off the trailer sway control increases the risk
of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not
recommend turning off this feature except in situations where reducing
vehicle speed may be dangerous (e.g. driving uphill) or the driver has
significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it
begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may
activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies the vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if
necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the
traction control system light flashes and TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display. The first thing to do is slow
the vehicle down, then pull safely to the side of the road and check for
proper tongue load and trailer load distribution. Refer to Load Carrying
chapter for specific loading information.
Trailer sway control can be turned off by using the information display
control; refer to the Information Displays chapter. The system turns
back on whenever the ignition is turned on.
Towing 217
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Powertrain Maximum GCWR - lb (kg) Maximum Trailer Weight -
lb (kg)
FWD 3.7L
1
8270 (3751) 2000 (907)
FWD 3.7L
2
8270 (3751) 3500 (1588)
AWD 3.7L
1
8440 (3828) 2000 (907)
AWD 3.7L
2
8440 (3828) 3500 (1588)
1
Vehicles not equipped with a trailer tow package and vehicles equipped
with 22 inch wheels are limited to a 2000 lb (907 kg) trailer weight.
2
Vehicles equipped with trailer tow package
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance information.
For load specification terms found on the label and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Tow Connector (Vehicles Equipped with a Trailer Tow/Prep
Package)
The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Color Function
1. Dark Green Right turn signal/brake lamp/hazard flasher
2. Yellow Left turn signal/brake lamp/hazard flasher
3. Brown Tail lamps/parking lamps
4. White Ground
218 Towing
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle. Distribute the trailer load so 10–15% of the total trailer weight is on
the tongue.
Safety Chains
Always connect the safety chains to the vehicle’s hook retainers. To
connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow
slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the rental agency’s instructions.
Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer Brakes
Note: The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Be sure the trailer conforms to all applicable local and Federal
regulations regarding trailer braking. If the trailer is equipped with
electronically-controlled brakes, the brakes need to have an electronic
brake controller with associated wiring installed to the vehicle by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Ensure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing-up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
Towing 219
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers) and do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) to aid in engine/transmission
cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may turn off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with the grade assist feature, use this
feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade, place
wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
220 Towing
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed from the front if proper
wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground. The
rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion.
FWD vehicles can also be towed from the rear using wheel lift
equipment; however, the front wheels must be placed on a dolly to
prevent damage to the transmission.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles must be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment, with all the wheels off the ground, to prevent damage
to the transmission, AWD system or vehicle. If the vehicle is towed by other
means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur.
Towing 221
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled (without access to wheel
dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration) under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward direction.
• The transmission is placed in N (Neutral). Refer to Automatic
transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the
transmission into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck). These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle
after it is hooked-up to the RV or tow dolly.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with all four wheels on
the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly.
If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider. If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground,
refer to the towing instructions found at the end of this section.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles can be towed with all four wheels on the
ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport
trailer. Do not tow your AWD vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground; this
will cause damage to your AWD system. If you are using a vehicle
transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the equipment
provider. If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground, refer to
the towing instructions found at the end of this section.
222 Towing
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Place the ignition in the accessory mode. Refer to Ignition in the
Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter.
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and every six hours thereafter. With the engine running
and your foot on the brake, shift into D (Drive) and then into R
(Reverse) before shifting back into N (Neutral).
Towing 223
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
224 Driving Hints
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Drive through water in an emergency only, and not
as part of normal driving.
WARNING: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air
filter.
Note: Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
or air intake and can cause internal vehicle damage or cause it to stall.
Note: Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be
limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely
damage your engine or your vehicle
may stall.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
Driving Hints 225
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
226 Driving Hints
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
Driving Hints 227
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the Owner’s Guide
portfolio in the glove compartment.
228 Roadside Emergencies
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-521-4140.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Getting roadside assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your battery.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Roadside Emergencies 229
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the
stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Preparing Your Vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm soft shifts, firm shifts or both. This operation
is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
230 Roadside Emergencies
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
4
2
1
3
Roadside Emergencies 231
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
232 Roadside Emergencies
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft威 parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.lincolnowner.com
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
Customer Assistance 233
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
234 Customer Assistance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement
vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
Customer Assistance 235
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services you
need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE
program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before
an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided
and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
236 Customer Assistance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA
ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
Customer Assistance 237
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer.
If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
238 Customer Assistance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
Customer Assistance 239
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
240 Customer Assistance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
Fuses 241
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 — Not used
2 — Not used
3 — Not used
97
98
77
96
95
94
9392919089
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
1816 17
312 456789
19 20 21 22 23 24
27 28 29 30 31
40 41 42 43
55
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
67
45
32
10 11
12
13
33 34 35
46 47 48 49 50 51
68 69 70 71 72
74
73
76
75
53
3736
54
38
25
15
14
52
242 Fuses
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
4 30A** Wipers
5 40A** Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
pump
6 — Not used
7 30A** Power liftgate
8 20A** Moonroof
9 20A** Powerpoint #2 (console rear)
10 — Not used
11 — Rear window defroster/heated
mirror relay
12 — Not used
13 — Starter relay
14 — Not used
15 — Fuel pump relay
16 — Not used
17 — Not used
18 40A** Blower motor
19 30A** Starter motor
20 20A** Powerpoint #1 (console bin)
21 20A** Cargo area powerpoint
22 — Not used
23 30A** Driver seat module
24 — Not used
25 — Not used
26 40A** Rear window defroster
27 20A** Front powerpoint/lighter
28 30A** Climate controlled seats
29 — Not used
30 30A** Rear heated seats
31 — Not used
32 — Not used
Fuses 243
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
33 — Not used
34 — Blower motor relay
35 — Not used
36 — Rear seat relay
37 — Right trailer tow (TT) stop/turn
lamps relay
38 — Not used
39 40A** Cooling fan (vehicles with TT)
60A** Cooling fan (vehicles without TT)
40 40A** Cooling fan (TT only)
41 — Not used
42 30A** Passenger seat
43 25A** ABS valves
44 — Rear washer relay
45 5A* Rain sensor
46 — Not used
47 — Not used
48 — Not used
49 — Not used
50 15A* Heated mirror
51 — Not used
52 — Not used
53 — Left TT stop/turn lamps relay
54 — Not used
55 — Wiper relay
56 — Not used
57 20A* Left high-intensity discharge
(HID) headlamps
58 10A* Alternator sensor
59 10A* Brake on/off switch
60 — Not used
244 Fuses
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
61 10A* Rear seat release
62 10A* A/C clutch
63 15A* TT stop/turn lamps relay
64 20A* Rear wiper motor
65 15A* Fuel pump
66 — Powertrain control module
(PCM) relay
67 20A* Vehicle power (VPWR) #2
68 15A* VPWR #4
69 15A* VPWR #1
70 10A* A/C relay, All-wheel drive module
71 — Not used
72 — Not used
73 — Not used
74 — Not used
75 — A/C clutch diode
76 — Not used
77 — TT park lamps relay
78 20A* Right HID headlamps
79 5A* Adaptive cruise control
80 — Not used
81 — Not used
82 15A* Rear washer
83 — Not used
84 20A* TT park lamps
85 — Not used
86 7.5A* PCM keep-alive, PCM relay
87 5A* Run/start relay
88 — Run/start relay
89 5A* Adaptive lighting
90 10A* PCM
Fuses 245
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
91 10A* Adaptive cruise control
92 10A* ABS module
93 5A* Blower motor/rear defroster relay
94 30A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start
95 — Not used
96 — Not used
97 — Not used
98 — A/C clutch relay
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the
driver’s footwell near the parking brake. To remove the trim panel, slide
the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out.
To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into
place. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure.
To reinstall the trim panel, align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with
the grooves, push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to
secure the panel.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
246 Fuses
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 30A Driver front smart window
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 30A Passenger front smart window
4 10A Demand lamps relay
5 20A Subwoofer
6 5A Radio frequency module
7 7.5A Power mirror switch, Memory seat
switch, Driver seat module
8 10A Not used (spare)
9 10A Power liftgate
10 10A Run/accessory relay
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 33 41
42
43
44
45
34
35
36
37
23
24
25
26
27
28 38 46
39 4729
32
40
31
30
48
49
Fuses 247
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
11 10A Instrument panel cluster, Heads-up
display
12 15A Interior lighting, Puddle lamps,
Backlighting
13 15A Right turn/stop lamps and turn
signals
14 15A Left turn/stop lamps and turn
signals
15 15A Reverse lamps, High-mounted stop
lamps
16 10A Low beam headlamps (right)
17 10A Low beam headlamps (left)
18 10A Keypad illumination, Brake shift
interlock, Start button LED, Passive
anti-theft system, Powertrain
control module wake-up, Second
row power enable
19 20A Audio amplifier
20 20A Lock/unlock relays – vehicles
without intelligent access (IA)
21 10A Not used (spare)
22 20A Horn relay
23 15A Steering wheel control, Intelligent
access (IA), Headlamp switch
24 15A Power tilt/telescope steering
column, On-board diagnostics
25 15A Liftgate release
26 5A Global positioning system module
27 20A Intelligent access (IA)
28 15A Ignition switch (without IA), Key
inhibit solenoid, Push button start
(with IA)
248 Fuses
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
29 20A Radio, Electronic finish panel,
SYNC威 module
30 15A Front park lamps
31 5A Not used (spare)
32 15A Moonroof, Power windows (front),
Compass/auto-dimming rear view
mirror
33 10A Not used (spare)
34 10A Reverse sensing system, Rearview
camera, Blind spot monitor, Rear
heated seat module
35 5A Heads-up display
36 10A Heated steering wheel
37 10A Climate control
38 10A Not used (spare)
39 15A High beam headlamps
40 10A Rear park lamps, License plate
lamps
41 7.5A Occupant classification sensor,
Restraints control module
42 5A Not used (spare)
43 10A Not used (spare)
44 10A Not used (spare)
45 5A Not used (spare)
46 10A Climate control
47 15A Fog lamps relay, LED signal mirrors
48 30A Circuit
Breaker
Rear power windows
49 — Delayed accessory relay
Fuses 249
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers that
are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
250 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel near
the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the secondary hood latch
located under the front passenger
side of the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.
Maintenance 251
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A. Engine coolant reservoir
B. Power steering fluid reservoir
C. Brake fluid reservoir
D. Battery
E. Power distribution box
F. Air filter assembly
G. Transmission fluid dipstick
H. Engine oil dipstick
I. Engine oil filler cap
J. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
J I H
G
F
EDCBA
252 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately.
Adding engine oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications for more information.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.
Maintenance 253
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the coolant level
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240E available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolant immediately.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
254 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives as
they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft威
Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with prediluted engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Maintenance 255
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted
engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
256 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Maintenance 257
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been operated for
an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or
pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating
temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking.
Depending on vehicle use, cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or
longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
WARNING: The dipstick cap and surrounding components may
be hot; gloves are recommended.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Under hood overview in this chapter for the location
of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by
turning it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
If the fluid level is below the MIN
range of the dipstick, add fluid to
reach the hash mark level. Note: If
the fluid level is below the MIN level,
do not drive the vehicle. An underfill condition may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
MAX
MIN
258 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
The transmission fluid level should be
targeted within the cross-hatch area
if at normal operating temperature
180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C) .
High fluid level
If the fluid level is above the MAX
range of the dipstick, remove fluid to
reach the hashmark level.
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city
traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached. Depending
on vehicle use, cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Technical
specifications section in this chapter.
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250
ml) increments through the filler tube
until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
Maintenance 259
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the proper fluid type.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result
in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
260 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft威 maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Maintenance 261
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS),
any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their
ground connection made directly at the negative battery post. A
connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches
the electrical requirements of the vehicle.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of
this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This operation is
considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Note: Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local
authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
262 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
Maintenance 263
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the wiper
arm and press it into place until a
click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm with one hand
close to the arm/blade joint and pull
it as far away from the glass as
possible. Do not use excessive force
because it can break the wiper arm
at the heel. Hold it there until the
next step.
2. Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to
the arm/blade joint.
3. Grip tightly and press on the arm/blade joint from beneath and
separate the blade from the arm.
264 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Attach the new wiper to the wiper
arm and press it into place until a click
is heard.
If you find this procedure too difficult,
please see your dealer.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the
air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover
clean to remove any dirt or debris and to
ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
Maintenance 265
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the
clamps. Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are
engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and
mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall
or screen at this height.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
266 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For vehicles with halogen headlamps:
On the wall or screen you will
observe a flat zone of high intensity
light located at the top of the right
hand portion of the beam pattern. If
the top edge of the high intensity
light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will
need to be adjusted.
For vehicles with HID headlamps:
There is a distinct cut-off (change
from light to dark) in the left
portion of the beam pattern. The
top edge of this cut-off should be
positioned 2 inches (5 cm) below
the horizontal reference line.
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Hex head
driver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up). The
horizontal edge of the brighter light
should touch the horizontal
reference line.
5. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Maintenance 267
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the bulb cover.
268 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove
it.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb.
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
authorized dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the wheel well, remove the fasteners from the
splash shield, then pull the splash shield back to
gain access to the bulbs.
Maintenance 269
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
Replacing side marker bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with LED side marker bulbs. It is designed to
last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see your authorized
dealer.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the fog lamp switch is in the off position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
remove the splash shield and rotate
the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from the
fog lamp.
3. Carefully disconnect the bulb from the harness assembly via the two
snap clips.
4. Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb.
Replacing backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
liftgate to expose the lamp assembly bolts.
270 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Remove the two bolts from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two bolts.
Replacing tail/stop/turn/side marker lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with a tail/stop/turn/sidemarker lamp assembly
containing integral multiple light emitting diodes (LED). See your
authorized dealer for the replacement LED module.
Replacing supplemental liftgate lamp assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate lamp assembly containing integral
multiple light emitting diodes (LED). If one or more LEDs burn out, the
complete lamp module has to be replaced. See your authorized dealer for
the replacement LED module.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high-mount stop lamp. It is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from the
liftgate.
Maintenance 271
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out
from the lamp assembly.
4. Install new bulb(s) in reverse
order.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must
be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for
Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe
visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function Number of Bulbs Trade Number
Headlamp low/high beam
(halogen)
2 HIR2
* Headlamp low/high beam (HID) 2 D3S
* Front sidemarker lamp N/A LED
Front park/turn signal lamp 2
3457NAK
(amber)
* Rear sidemarker lamp N/A LED
* Stop/tail/turn lamp N/A LED
Backup lamp 2 921
License plate lamp 2 C5W
* High-mount brake lamp N/A LED
Fog lamp (if equipped) 2 H11
Front row map lamp 2 1600XB
Second row dome/reading lamp 3 211-2XB
Rear courtesy lamp 1 211-2XB
Visor vanity lamp 2 37
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
272 Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
Vehicle Care 273
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash
off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as
you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the
cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean,
dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning plastic exterior parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover.
274 Vehicle Care
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
Vehicle Care 275
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the
rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
276 Vehicle Care
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish
of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
Vehicle Care 277
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner . Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and
brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
278 Vehicle Care
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to
prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Vehicle Care 279
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more), fuel
may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer product to
the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods
exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label. The vehicle
should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive
throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
280 Vehicle Care
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
Vehicle Care 281
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Important Information for P265/40R22 Low-profile Tires and Wheels
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not cover these types of damage.
Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra
caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts
that could cause wheel and tire damage.
If your vehicle is equipped with P265/40R22 tires, they are low-profile
tires. These tires and wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport
appearance. With low-profile tires, you may notice an increase in road
noise and faster tire wear, depending on road conditions and driving
styles. Due to their design, low-profile tires and wheels are more prone
to road damage from potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails
and curb contact than standard tires and wheels.
Notice To Crossover Vehicle Owners
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Crossover vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
WARNING: Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
282 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your owner’s manual for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD
vehicles. Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. This feature
gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving
surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle under other
than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which
might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty.
With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front wheels and
distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases traction which
may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The system is active all the
time and requires no input from the operator.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive.
Wheels and Tires 283
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Crossover vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional differences, crossover vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
284 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheels and Tires 285
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver ’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
286 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Wheels and Tires 287
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those
with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
288 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Wheels and Tires 289
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for “LT ”
Type Tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
B
C
B
D
290 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” Type Tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading section.
A
B
C
D
E
Wheels and Tires 291
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or
“blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
292 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Wheels and Tires 293
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare tire
and wheel assembly information section for description): Store and
maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see
the Dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly information section for
description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these “wear bars”,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
294 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Wheels and Tires 295
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
296 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Wheels and Tires 297
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest
safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your
safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
298 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Front-wheel drive
(FWD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at left of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Wheels and Tires 299
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and cable chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S cables or equivalent.
• Use SAE Class S cables only on the front axle on vehicles equipped
with P245/60R18 tires.
• Do not use tire cables or optional traction devices with P245/50R20 or
P265/40R22 tires.
• Install cables securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the cables. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire cables on dry roads.
300 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Wheels and Tires 301
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing Tires with a TPMS
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an
authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your
vehicle.
302 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with a
TPMS in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Solid warning
light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Wheels and Tires 303
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Flashing
warning light
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
304 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on
the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in this chapter for important information. If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
earlier in the chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the
authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly , then it is
intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel
assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that
were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired.
Wheels and Tires 305
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel
306 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Wheels and Tires 307
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) and turn the engine off.
3. Lift the carpeted load floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle and
remove the spare tire cover (if equipped).
4. Remove the wing nut securing the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the washer, temporary spare
and jack assembly from the cargo area
Vehicle jacking
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
308 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the
yellow warning label on the jack.
Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
4. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking
points.
5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. Refer to Wheel lug
nut torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
Wheels and Tires 309
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Stowing the flat/spare tire and jack
1. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack kit is
secured in its original location and orientation in the jack kit recess
under the flat/spare tire. Unblock the wheels.
Note: If you are stowing a flat 22 inch tire and wheel assembly,
temporarily remove the load floor, plastic stowage bins (if equipped), and
the foam load floor supports to make space. Place the 22 inch tire &
wheel assembly in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down.
Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a
wheel opening. Replace the plastic stowage bins (if equipped) and foam
load floor supports around the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly.
Note: If you are stowing a flat tire, place the tire in the spare tire well
with the valve stem facing down. Rotate the tire until the jack assembly
is able to protrude through a wheel opening.
Note: If you are stowing the spare tire, place the spare in the spare tire
well in its original position.
2. Secure the wheel by replacing the washer and the wing nut and
turning the wing nut clockwise.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
size/Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
310 Wheels and Tires
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole (1) and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
Wheels and Tires 311
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 3.7L V6 engine
Cubic inches 227
Required fuel Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1–4–2–5–3–6
Ignition system Coil on plug
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch (1.25–1.35 mm)
Engine drivebelt routing
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine.
312 Capacities and Specifications
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity Ford Part Name
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Brake fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft威 High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Spray Lubricant
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
Door latch, hood
latch, auxiliary hood
latch, door hinges,
striker plates, seat
tracks and fuel filler
door hinge
—
Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft威 Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Capacities and Specifications 313
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford Part Name
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Engine oil
1,2
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil
(Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A with API
Certification Mark
Engine coolant
3
11.7 quarts
(11.1L)
4,5
Motorcraft威 Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
•VC-3DIL-B (US)
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
Power steering fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft威 MERCON威
LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Automatic
transmission fluid
6,7
11.0 quarts (10.4L)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Rear differential
(AWD) fluid
2.4 pints (1.15L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
314 Capacities and Specifications
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford Part Name
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) fluid (AWD)
8
12 ounces (0.35L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Windshield washer
fluid
Fill as required
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada)/
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Fuel tank
(front-wheel drive)
18.3 gallons
(69.3L)
——
Fuel tank (all-wheel
drive)
19.2 gallons
(72.7L)
——
1
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20 and display the API Certification
Mark.
2
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Indicates only approximate dry fill capacity. Some applications may vary.
5
Engine coolant with trailer tow package - 11.9 quarts (11.3L)
Capacities and Specifications 315
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford Part Name
Ford Part Number /
Ford Specification
6
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size
and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be
set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
7
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval.
8
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
316 Capacities and Specifications
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Motorcraft part numbers
Component 3.7L V6 engine
Air filter element FA-1884
Battery BXT-65-650
Oil filter FL-500-S
Spark plugs SP-520
1
Cabin air filter FP65
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2601-PF (driver side)
WW-2001-PF (passenger side)
WW-1401-PF (rear)
1
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or equivalent
replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage
to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Capacities and Specifications 317
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.
318 Capacities and Specifications
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
6-speed automatic transmission (6F50) J
Capacities and Specifications 319
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Lincoln.com (U.S. only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Lincoln or Lincoln of Canada dealer. Lincoln Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Lincoln Custom
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Side window deflectors
• Splash guards
Interior style
• Ambient lighting
• Sport pedals
• Floor mats
• Rear seat entertainment*
Lifestyle
• Ash cup / coin holder
• Cross bars and roof rails
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
• Cargo organization and management
• Roof rack and carriers*
• SUV camping tent*
• Cargo net*
Peace of mind
• Vehicle security
• Locking fuel plug
320 Accessories
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Cargo security shade
• Cargo area protector
• Bumper protector
• Wheel locks
• Hitch-mounted parking sensors*
*Lincoln Licensed Accessories are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Lincoln Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the Lincoln Licensed Accessories product
limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Lincoln custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner, may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
Accessories 321
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind” protection
beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
322 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention
for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades • Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
California)
• Shock absorbers
• Clutch disc • Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Ford Extended Service Plan 323
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN!
Name
To learn more, call our
Ford
ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377, and don't forget to ask about our interest free payment
program, allowing you all the security and benefits Ford
ESP
has to offer while paying over time. Your pre-approved with
no credit checks,no hassles!
Or, complete the information below and mail this to:
Ford
ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-9933
ADDRESS
APT. #
STATE ZIP CITY
E-MAIL
(PLEASE PRINT)
324 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Ford Extended Service Plan 325
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians, have received. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and
built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer
develops these systems using different specifications and performance
features. That’s why it’s important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft威 and Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts branded replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12,000 mile (20,000 km) parts and labor limited
warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet
Ford specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions
compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
326 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ (IOLM)
system which displays a message in the message center at the proper oil
change service interval; this interval may be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the message center display, it’s time for
an oil change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ must
be reset after each oil change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft威 or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement for parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Scheduled Maintenance 327
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
this book and in the Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals or
additives not approved by Ford and are not recommended as part of
normal maintenance. Please consult your Warranty Manual for
complete warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and,
by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to
be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating
and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a
qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership.
Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or
in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for
many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that
systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to
fill and operate the system, or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six months intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level
Function of all interior and exterior lights
Tires for wear and proper pressure, including spare
Windshield washer fluid level
Check every six months
Battery connections; clean if necessary
Body and door drain holes for obstructions; clean if necessary
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength
Door weatherstrips for wear; lubricate if necessary
Hinges/latches/outside locks for proper operation; lubricate if necessary
Parking brake for proper operation
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation
Washer spray/wiper operation; clean or replace blades as necessary
328 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s) Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires for wear and proper pressure,
including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and
window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance 329
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
330 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ that
determines when the engine oil should be changed based on how your
vehicles is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce
environmental waste at the same time. This means you won’t have to
remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets
you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE
DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the message center. The following
table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on
engine oil change intervals; it is provided as a guideline only. Actual
engine oil change intervals will depend on several factors and will
generally decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Miles (km) Vehicle use and examples
7500-10000
(12000-16000)
Normal
– Normal commuting with highway driving
– No, or moderate, load/towing
– Flat to moderately hilly roads
– No extended idling
5000-7499
(8000-11999)
Severe
– Moderate to heavy load/towing
– Mountainous or off-road conditions
– Extended idling
– Extended hot or cold operation
3000-4999
(4000-7999)
Extreme
– Maximum load/towing
– Extreme hot or cold operation
Scheduled Maintenance 331
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Normal Scheduled Maintenance - At every oil change interval as
indicated by the message center
Change engine oil and filter
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick);
consult dealer for requirements
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and
parking brake
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped)
Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect rear axle and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
(AWD vehicles)
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped)
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft
and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear,
looseness or drag
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km) between
service intervals
332 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional maintenance items
1
Miles (x 1,000) 20 30 40 60 80 90 100 120 140 150
Kilometers (x 1,000) 32 48 64 96 128 144 160 192 225 240
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped) • ••• •••
Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if equipped) •••••
Replace engine air filter •••••
Change engine coolant
2
•
Replace spark plugs •
Inspect accessory drive belt(s) ••
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter •
Change manual transmission fluid •
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced within the last
100,000 miles (160,000 km)
•
1
Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the last oil change. Do not exceed
the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), then every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Scheduled Maintenance 333
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
334 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 335
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
336 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or
within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing in the message center.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Scheduled Maintenance 337
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as
in heavy commercial use (i.e. delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in the
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty
roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Perform multi-point inspection
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid (except
Focus)
Every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel
338 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Police Interceptor equipped with engine idle hour meter
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the brake system
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months or as
indicated by
time/mileage
calculation
Change engine oil and filter (see description
below)
Perform multi-point inspection
Every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Scheduled Maintenance 339
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE IDLE HOUR METER (IF EQUIPPED):
Your vehicle may be equipped with an idle meter to indicate how much
time the vehicle is idling in P (Park) or N (Neutral). The meter is
incorporated with the vehicle odometer. Depressing the odometer-reset
button once will display the trip odometer (miles [km] followed by a “T”
for trip odometer); depressing the odometer-reset button a second time
will display the idle meter (hours followed by an “H” for hours). The idle
meter only accumulates time when the vehicle is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral). Displayed time is cumulative for the vehicle. It cannot be
reset to zero. Police/Fleet vehicles often experience long periods of
idling, during which engine oil will continue to break down but distance
is not accumulated on the odometer.
To assist fleet managers in maintaining proper oil change intervals, the
idle meter will help determine when an oil change is required. For every
hour that the vehicle idles, it has accumulated the equivalent of
approximately 33 miles (53 km) of driving. Using the combination of the
vehicle odometer and idle meter allows the fleet manager to better
determine when the oil needs to be changed
Engine idle hour meter calculation:
Idle hours x 33 = miles (km) equivalency
Miles (km) driven + miles (km) equivalency = oil change interval
Example: When the odometer has accumulated 3,000 miles (4,800 km)
and the idle meter shows 61 hours, a 5,000 mile (8,000 km) oil change
interval will have been reached: 3,000 road miles (4,800 road km) + (61
idle hours x 33 miles [53 km]/idle hour) = 5,013 miles (8,067 km).
340 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 341
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
342 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They are listed
below:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should be
changed every 3,000 miles (4,800 km) or three months, whichever comes
first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part
number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles (refer to Technical specifications in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Class A Motorhome: Change brake fluid every two years.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
If the available API “SM” or “SN” oils are not available, then the oil
change service interval is 3,000 mile (4,800 km).
Scheduled Maintenance 343
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Edge/MKX AWD only – vehicles operating off-road in sand during high
ambient temperatures must replace the AWD PTU (All-wheel drive
Power Transfer Unit) lube every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter and
cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
344 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTRODUCTION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features are not available while the vehicle is moving.
This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access to
vehicle features and settings. The comprehensive touchscreen provides
easy interaction with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control
and navigation system. The corners display any active modes within
those menus, such as your phone being connected or the climate
temperature.
Press to select any of the following:
• Clock
• Sound
• Settings
• Display
• Vehicle
• Help
Press to select any of the following:
• SYNC Services
• Notifications
• SYNC Apps
• SIRIUS Travel Link
• Calendar
MyLincoln Touch™ 345
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the icon is yellow, refer to Notifications in the Information section of
this chapter.
Press to select any of the following:
• Quick Dial
• Call History
• Settings
• Phonebook
• Text Messaging
• Making and Receiving Calls
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home
• Previous Destinations
• Emergency
• Intersection
• Map
• Favorites
• Point of Interests
• Street Address
• City Center
Press to select any of the following:
• AM/FM
• CD
• BT Stereo
• SD Card
• SIRIUS
• USB
• AV In
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost
346 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your
screens may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this
section. Your features may also be limited depending on your market.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
Customizing Your Home Screen
Press the house icon to access the home screen.
Using the Touch-Sensitive Controls on Your System
Your vehicle’s centerstack has touch-sensitive switches for your
infotainment and climate control systems. To turn a feature on and off,
just touch the graphic with your finger. To get the best performance from
the touch-sensitive controls, keep in mind:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may cause a nearby control to turn
on or off.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Metal and other conductive material should be kept away from the
surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference
(i.e. control activation).
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
• Power: Turn the media (or climate features) on or off.
• VOL and fan slider bars: Slide your finger over the rear slider area to
increase or decrease the volume or fan levels.
MyLincoln Touch™ 347
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD.
• SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes.
The screen does not change, but you see the media changes in the
lower left status bar.
• SOUND: Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can
make adjustments to settings such as: Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance
and Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if equipped),
Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and Speed Compensated Volume
settings.
• Hazard flasher: Press the button to turn the hazard flashers on or off.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Clean the display with a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning
glasses. If dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do
not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
aren’t able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
348 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair SYNC威. See your authorized
dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords and/or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or cables where
they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals,
seats and/or compartments, or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in the vehicle in extreme conditions as it
could cause damage to your device. Refer to your device’s user guide
for further information.
• For your safety, some SYNC威 functions are speed dependent and
cannot be performed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using with
SYNC威.
Speed-Restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while the vehicle
is in motion so they’re restricted from being modified unless the vehicle
is not moving. Some examples of these are listed below:
• Screens that are too crowded with information, such as Point of
Interest (POI) reviews and ratings, SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ sports
scores, movie times, ski conditions, etc.
• Any action that requires using a keyboard, such as entering a
navigation destination or editing information
• All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (e.g. phone
contacts, recent phone call entries)
MyLincoln Touch™ 349
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Listed below are more specific features that can only be modified while
the vehicle is not moving:
Restricted features
Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading
phonebook contacts (from a USB)
Lists entries are limited for phone contacts
and recent phone call entries
System Functionality Setting-up or editing shortcut buttons on the
home screen
Editing the keypad code
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or
Active Park Assist are active
Wi-Fi/Wireless Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks
Videos/Photos/Graphics Playing video
Graphic album art carousel
Editing photos
Editing the screen’s wallpaper or adding new
wallpaper
Text Messages Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding/Editing Address Book entries or Avoid
Areas
350 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Privacy information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC威, SYNC威 creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to
SYNC威. In addition, if you connect a media device, SYNC威 creates and
retains an index of media content supported by SYNC威. SYNC威 also
records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent SYNC威 activity. The log profile and other SYNC威 data may be
used to improve SYNC威 and help diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain
in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in the
vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no
longer plan to use SYNC威 or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all information stored in SYNC威.
SYNC威 data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC威 module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada
will not access SYNC威 data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist™ (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
MyLincoln Touch™ 351
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ACCESSING AND ADJUSTING MODES THROUGH YOUR
INFOTAINMENT DISPLAY
The infotainment display is located on the right side of your instrument
cluster. It allows you to view and make minor adjustments to active
modes without taking your hands off the wheel. For example:
• In entertainment mode, you can view what is now playing, change the
audio source, select presets and make some adjustments.
• In phone mode, you can accept or reject an incoming call.
• In navigation mode (if equipped), you can view the current route or
activate a route.
• In climate mode, the driver side temperature can bet set as well as fan
speed.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on
the right side of your steering wheel
to scroll through the available
modes:
Entertainment
Phone
km/h
80
60
40
20
0
20
0
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
220
100
120
140
MPH
352 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation
Climate
You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button or
touching the screen. If you make a selection by touching the screen, the
selection menu expands and you are allowed different options.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen
mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, Compass appears
in the display instead of Navigation. If you press the right arrow to go
into the Compass menu, you can see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling, not “true”
direction (i.e. if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the compass
graphic displays west; north displays to the left of west though its “true”
direction is to the right of west.)
USING YOUR VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front
of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the
chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may also appear in the
lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (i.e.,
listening, success, failed, paused or try again).
MyLincoln Touch™ 353
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How to Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command
clearly.
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.*
“Mobile Apps” Access mobile applications.*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*If equipped, U.S. only
These commands can be said at any time
“Main Menu”
“List of Commands”
“What can I say?”
“Next Page”
“Previous Page”
“Go Back”
“Cancel”
“Exit”
“Help”
354 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for the current session, do one
of the following:
• During a voice session, press the lower left status bar of the screen,
OR
• Say “What can I say?” for an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice session, OR
• Press the voice icon; after the tone, say “Help” for an audible list of
possible voice commands.
To Access a List of Available Commands
• Press Menu > Help > Voice Command List, OR
• Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command clearly (if
available):
Voice command list
“List of Commands”
“Phone List of Commands ”
“Radio List of Commands”
“CD List of Commands”
“Navigation List of Commands”*
“Travel Link List of Commands”*
“Sirius Satellite List of Commands”*
“Audio List of Commands”
“USB List of Commands”
“SD Card List of Commands”
“Bluetooth Audio List of Commands”
“Browse List of Commands”
“Climate Control List of Commands”
“Voice Settings List of Commands”
“Voice Instructions List of Commands”
“Help”
*If equipped
MyLincoln Touch™ 355
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise
from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from
correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
“Listening” appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction, help
and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction which uses
candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides more detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: Confirmation prompts are short questions the
system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are
multiple possible responses to your request. If turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still
occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
Phone/Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are a list of possible
results from your voice commands. The system creates these lists when
it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
To access these settings using the touchscreen:
1. Press Menu > Settings > Voice Control.
2. Select from:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume
356 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To access these settings using voice commands:
Press the voice icon; after the tone sounds, the system says
“Please say a command”. Another tone sounds to let you know
the system is listening. Say any of the following commands
Voice settings using voice commands
“Interaction Mode Novice”
“Interaction Mode Advanced”
“Confirmation Prompts On ”
“Confirmation Prompts Off”
“Phone Candidate Lists On”
“Phone Candidate Lists Off”
“Media Candidate Lists On”
“Media Candidate Lists Off”
“Help”
Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and making on-screen selections. This is
most often available when using navigation.
On-screen buttons are outlined in blue to indicate the selections that are
part of the dual mode feature. For example, if while you are in a voice
session rather than saying the command “Enter Street Name” to change
the field, you can press “Street” and the voice session does not end.
Instead, the voice system changes to the Street field and asks you to say
the street name. The buttons not outlined in blue cannot be used as
voice commands; if they are touched during a voice session, the voice
session is canceled. For example:
From the Navigation home screen, you can choose from the following:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest (POI)
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• Cancel Route
MyLincoln Touch™ 357
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen
are:
“DESTINATION”
“Destination My Home”
“Destination Street Address”
“Destination Favorites”
“Destination Previous Destinations”
“Destination POI”
“Destination Intersection”
“Destination Emergency”
If you choose Street Address from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• Number
• City
• Street Name
• State/Prov
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen
are:
“STREET ADDRESS”
“Enter House Number”
“Change House Number”
“Enter Street Name”
“Change Street Name”
“Enter City”
“Change City”
“Enter State”
“Change State”
If you choose Points of Interest from the navigation screen, you can
choose from the following:
• Search Area
• Search By Name
• Fuel Station
• ATM
• All Restaurants
• Accommodations
• Parking
358 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen
are:
“POINTS OF INTEREST” or “POI”
“Destination <POI Category Name>”
“Search By Name”
“Search By Category”
“Change Search Area”
Note: These are just a sample of the voice commands available within
the Points of Interest section; the categories themselves are also
technically voice commands.
If you choose Intersection from the navigation screen, you can choose
from the following:
• 1st Street
• 2nd Street
• City
• State/Prov
Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen
are:
“INTERSECTION”
“Enter First Street Name”
“Change First Street Name”
“Enter Second Street Name”
“Change Second Street Name”
“Enter City”
“Change City”
“Enter State”
“Change State”
The dual mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a
list of items to pick from during a voice session, where you would be able
to touch the line item or say “Line 2”. If a command is not understood or
there are multiple options, the system returns a list for you to choose
from.
MyLincoln Touch™ 359
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LISTENING TO MUSIC
Your system offers many media options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
Browse Voice Commands
When listening to any type of audio, you can browse through other
devices without having to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to the radio, you can browse all the artists that are
stored on your USB device.
Press the voice icon on the steering wheel. When prompted, you
can say:
Browse voice commands
“Browse SIRIUS Channel Guide”
1
“Browse <Genre> Channels”
1
“Browse CD Track List”
“Browse SD Card”
“Browse USB”
“Browse <League> Games”
1
“Help”
“Browse”
2
1
If equipped with SIRIUS威 satellite radio
2
If you have said “Browse”, you can then say any commands in the
following chart.
“BROWSE”
“SIRIUS Channel Guide”*
“<League> Games”*
“CD Track List”
“SD Card”
“USB”
“Help”
*If equipped with SIRIUS威 satellite radio
For a complete list of “Browse” voice commands, refer to USB and SD
card voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the
following sections.
360 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AM/FM Radio
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select
theAMorFMtab.
To change between AM and FM, just touch one of the tabs. To
change between AM1/AM AST or the FM/FM1/FM2/FM AST presets,
repeatedly touch the lower left corner of the touchscreen.
When you select: You can:
One of the memory
preset areas (on the
right side of the
screen)
Save a station by pressing and holding one of
the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the station is being saved, then
sound returns when it’s done.
Direct Tune Enter the desired station number when
prompted. Press Enter.
Browse View a list of all available stations. Scroll and
select the desired station.
HD Radio Turn the feature on. This enables you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally (where
available), providing free, crystal clear sound.
Refer to the HD Radio™ information in the
following section.
MyLincoln Touch™ 361
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Options Adjust more audio system settings:
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX
Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped),
and Speed Compensated Volume settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select
a category of music you would like to search
for and then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations.
RDS Text Display On/Off allows you to
always view the information broadcast by FM
stations by selecting On.
Auto Presets (AST) - Autostore allows you
to have the system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
These do not override any presets stored in
any of the AM or FM frequency bands.
TAG Button On/Off (if available) allows
you to tag a song to download later.
When you select On, the TAG icon appears
on-screen when HD radio is active. You can
press TAG to save the information of the song
that is playing. When you plug in your
portable music player, the information is
transferred (if supported by your device).
When you are connected to iTunes威, the tags
appear to remind you of the songs you’d like
to download. Refer to the HD Radio™
information later in this chapter.
362 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“Radio On”
“Radio Off”
“Set PTY”
“AM”
“AM <530–1710>”
“AM Preset <#>”
“AM Autoset”
“AM Autoset Preset <#>”
“FM”
“FM1”
“FM2”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“FM Preset <#>”
“FM 1 Preset <#>”
“FM 2 Preset <#>”
“FM Autoset”
“FM Autoset Preset <#>”
“Preset <#>”
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”
1
“HD <#>”
1
“Tune”
2
“Browse”
3
“Help”
1
If available
2
If you have said, “Tune”, refer to the following “Tune” chart.
3
If you have said, “Browse”, refer to the Browse voice commands
earlier in this section.
MyLincoln Touch™ 363
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“TUNE”
“<530–1710>”
“AM”
“AM <530–1710>”
“AM Preset <#>”
“AM Autoset”
“AM Autoset Preset <#>”
“<87.9–107.9>”
“FM”
“FM1”
“FM2”
“FM <87.9–107.9>”
“FM Preset <#>”
“FM 1 Preset <#>”
“FM 2 Preset <#>”
“FM Autoset”
“FM Autoset Preset <#>”
“<87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
“HD <#>”*
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”*
“Preset <#>”
“Help”
*If available
HD Radio姞 Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
Your system has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than
analog broadcasts with free, crystal clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and
programming, please visit www.hdradio.com.
364 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When this feature is enabled and you are tuned to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your
screen:
HD) logo blinks when a digital
station is being acquired and is solid
when digital audio is playing. When
this logo is available, you may also
see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital
broadcasts.
The numbers that are highlighted signify available digital channels where
new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming
status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2–HD7) are only broadcast digitally.
Tagging allows you to save a song to download later. When
you are on an acquired HD Radio station, the TAG button is
available (provided the feature has been turned on). To use
the tag feature:
1. Press AM/FM > Options > TAG On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the song’s information and transfers it
to your portable music player (if supported) when it is connected to
the system. If your music player is connected at the time, the system
automatically transfers the tag to your player and a pop-up confirms
the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes威 with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you to be reminded of the song. The system allows you to
tag up to approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support
tagging, refer to www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca.
MyLincoln Touch™ 365
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is activated, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the
HD logo appear if the station has a digital
broadcast.
Seek Hear the next strong radio station.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Seek repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
multicast channel, press Seek to advance to
the next strong station.
Tune Go up and down the frequency in individual
increments.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Tune repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
broadcast channel, turn to advance to the
next frequency on the band.
366 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
To save a multicast
station as a preset
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot on the right of
the screen until the sound returns. There is a
brief mute, then the sound returns signifying
it was saved. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio is played as the system must
once again acquire the digital signal.
If you have turned this feature off and
pressed a memory preset containing an HD
Radio broadcast station, a pop-up appears
asking you if you would like to turn the
feature back on. As with any saved radio
station, you cannot access the saved station if
your vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
MyLincoln Touch™ 367
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio Reception/Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2–HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stay muted unless it is able
to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When a station is first received (aside from
HD2–HD7 multicast stations), the system first
plays the station in the analog version and
then, if receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. This shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog, is known as “blending”.
In order to provide the best possible experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Every station is independently
owned and operated. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio
streams and data fields are accurate.
368 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
See the following chart for potential station issues.
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
Poor time-alignment
by the radio
broadcaster.
None - broadcast
issue.
Sound fading or
blending in and out
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
None - reception issue
that may clear up as
you continue to drive.
Audio mute delay
when selecting
HD2/HD3, multicast
preset or direct tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
None - this is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access
HD2/HD3 multicast
channel when recalling
a preset or from a
direct tune
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
None - the station is
not available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.*
No text information
shown for currently
selected frequency
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.*
HD2–HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2–HD7 channel
search.
None - this is normal
behavior.
*http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
MyLincoln Touch™ 369
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the
SIRIUS tab.
When you select: You can:
One of the memory
preset areas (on the
right side of the
screen)
Save a station by pressing and holding one of
the memory preset areas. There is a brief
mute while the station is being saved, then
sound returns when it’s done.
Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number
using the on-screen keypad.
SIRIUS Press repeatedly to change SIRIUS modes
(SIRIUS 1, 2 or 3).
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it plays
again on any SIRIUS channel.
Browse View a list of all available stations. Scroll and
select the desired station.
You can also lock or skip unwanted channels
or view the song/artist on other stations.
Scan Hear a brief sampling of channels.
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can
replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as
long as you have remained tuned to the
current station. If you change stations, the
previous audio is erased.
While in replay mode:
Press and release the seek buttons to hear the
previous or next song.
Press and hold the seek buttons to advance to
reverse or fast forward in the current track.
Press play or pause to play or pause the
audio.
Press Replay again to return to live audio if
you had been using the replay feature to
replay audio.
370 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Options Adjust more audio system settings:
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX
Deep note demo (if equipped), DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy mode (if equipped),
and Speed compensated volume settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to
select the desired category (Rock, Country,
etc.) and then use Seek or Scan to initiate a
search for those channels.
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and
unlock channels, change or reset your PIN or
unlock all channels. To use this feature you
need your initial PIN which is 1234.
Artist/Title Alerts allows you to select
Artists and Titles that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are playing
on other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete
or turn off alerts. You can also set all alerts to
on or off. When an alert appears on the
screen, you can choose to Tune to the
channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event,
you can save your favorite teams so that the
system can alert you when they are playing
on a satellite radio channel.
Note: SIRIUS威 does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature
variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is
required when communicating with SIRIUS威
about your account.
MyLincoln Touch™ 371
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS威 satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS威 satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “SIRIUS”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“Sirius On”
“Sirius Off”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel Name>”
“Sports Game”
1
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 3”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT Preset <#>”
“ SAT 1 Preset <#>”
“SAT 2 Preset <#>”
“SAT 3 Preset <#>”
“Tune”
2
“Help”
1
Late availability: If you have said, “Sports Game”, refer to the
following “Sports Game” chart.
2
If you have said, “Tune”, refer to the following “Tune” chart.
“SPORTS GAME”
“Tune to the <team city> game”
“Tune to the <team city> <team name> game”
“Tune to the <team name> game”
“Tune to the <college name> game”
“Help”
372 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“TUNE”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel Name>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 3”
“Preset <#>”
“ SAT 1 Preset <#>”
“SAT 2 Preset <#>”
“SAT 3 Preset <#>”
“Help”
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS威
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale
or lease of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS威
satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN
to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is
found on the System Information Screen (SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To
access your ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then
SIRIUS > Options > ESN.
MyLincoln Touch™ 373
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS威 troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS威
system failure
Internal module or
system failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel Channel no longer
available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
374 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS威 troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Unsubscribed Channel Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS威 satellite or
SIRIUS威 tower to the
vehicle antenna.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威 Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
reactivate or resolve
subscription issues.
No Channels Available All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
Using the channel
guide, unlock or
unskip the channels.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS威 has updated
the channels available
for your vehicle.
No action required.
MyLincoln Touch™ 375
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CD
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the
CD tab. You can choose from Repeat, Shuffle, Scan and Options.
Options allows you to select additional sound settings:
When you select: You can:
Sound Settings Adjust Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and
Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP
(if equipped), Occupancy Mode (if equipped),
and Speed Compensated Volume settings.
Text Display settings Choose how you would like the information to
display on-screen.
Compression settings Access compression settings.
You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder (if
applicable).
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
CD voice commands
“Play”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Pause”
“Repeat”
“Repeat Track”
“Repeat Folder”*
“Repeat Off”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle CD”*
“Shuffle Folder”*
“Shuffle Off”
“Help”
*(WMA or MP3 only)
376 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press
the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to
remove it as this could cause damage.
The card slot can be used for your navigation card (if equipped) or for a
card which contains music. The slot is located either in the center
console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel.
To access and play music from your SD card slot, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
Insert the SD card into the card slot and select
the SD card tab once the system recognizes it.
You can then select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Repeat Repeat the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle Play music on the selected album or folder in
random order.
Browse Browse the contents of the SD card. It also
allows you to search and play by genre, artist,
album, etc.
Similar Music Choose music similar to that which is
currently playing.
MyLincoln Touch™ 377
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Options Select more settings:
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX
Deep note demo (if equipped), DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy mode (if equipped),
and speed compensated volume.
Text Display Settings allows you to set up
on-screen information displays.
Compression Settings allows you to access
compression settings.
Media Player Settings allows you to select
more settings.
Media Player Settings include:
Autoplay On/Off: When on, the system
automatically switches to the media source
when first connected so you can listen to
music that has been indexed. When off, the
system does not automatically switch to the
media source.
Bluetooth Devices: Connect, disconnect,
add or delete a device. Also set a device as
your favorite so the system automatically tries
to connect to it at every ignition cycle.
Gracenote Database Info: View the version
level of the Gracenote Database.
Gracenote Media Management On/Off:
When on, this feature gets metadata
information from the Gracenote Database for
your music files. This overrides information
from your device. The feature default is off.
Cover Art Priority: Device/Gracenote
When on, this feature gets cover art for your
music files from either your device or the
Gracenote Database. The feature default is
Device.
378 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Media Device
Information
Displays information about the device, if
connected and available.
Text Display Allows you to choose how you would like the
information to display on-screen.
To view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also press What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
For a complete listing of available voice commands, refer to Voice
commands for USB and SD card in the following USB section.
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.
MyLincoln Touch™ 379
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB Port
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash/thumb
drives and also charge devices if they support
this feature. Your USB ports are either located
in your center console or behind a small
access door in your instrument panel.
To access and play music from your USB, then press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
Insert the USB drive into the port and select the USB tab once the
system recognizes it. You can then select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Repeat Repeat the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle Play music on the selected album or folder in
random order.
Browse Browse the contents of the flash drive/thumb
drive. It also allows you to search and play by
genre, artist, album, etc.
Similar Music Choose music similar to that which is
currently playing.
380 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Options Select more settings:
Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass,
Treble, Midrange, Balance and Fade, THX
Deep note demo (if equipped), DSP (if
equipped), Occupancy mode (if equipped),
and speed compensated volume.
Media Player Settings allows you to select
more settings.
Media Player Settings includes:
Autoplay on/off: When on, the system
automatically switches to the media source
when first connected so you can listen to
music that has been indexed. When off, the
system does not automatically switch to the
media source.
Bluetooth Devices: Connect, disconnect,
add or delete a device. Also set a device as
your favorite so the system automatically tries
to connect to it at every ignition cycle.
Gracenote Database Info: View the version
level of the Gracenote Database.
Gracenote Media Management on/off:
When on, this feature gets metadata
information from the Gracenote Database for
your music files. This overrides information
from your device. The feature default is off.
Cover Art Priority: Device/Gracenote
When on, this feature gets cover art for your
music files from either your device or the
Gracenote Database. The feature default is
Device..
Media Device
Information
Displays information about the device, if
connected and available.
Text Display Allows you to choose how you would like the
information to display on-screen.
MyLincoln Touch™ 381
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also press What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
In order to playback video from your iPod威/iPhone威 (if compatible), you
MUST have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple威). When the cable is connected to
your iPod威/iPhone威, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “USB” or “SD Card”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
USB and SD card voice commands
“Browse”
1
“Next”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play Album <name>”
“Play All”
“Play Artist <name>”
“Play Audiobook <name>”
“Play Author <name>”
“Play Composer <name>”
“Play Folder <name>”
“Play Genre <name>”
“Play Movie <name>”
2
“Play Playlist <name>”
“Play Podcast <name>”
“Play Podcast Episode <name>”
“Play Similar Music”
382 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB and SD card voice commands
“Play song <name>”
“Play TV Show Episode <name>”
2
“Play Video <name>”
2
“Play Video Podcast Episode <name>”
2
“Play Video Playlist <name>”
2
“Previous”
“Repeat All”
“Repeat Off”
“Repeat One”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle Off”
“What’s this?”
“Help”
1
If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the
system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse. When
prompted, refer to the following “Browse” chart.
2
These commands are only available in USB mode and are
device-dependent.
“BROWSE”
“Genre <name>”
“All Genres”
“Playlist <Name>”
“All Playlists”
“Artist <name>”
“All Artists”
“Album <name>”
“All Albums”
“Author <name>”
“All Authors”
“Composer <name>”
“All Composers”
“Audiobook <name>”
MyLincoln Touch™ 383
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“BROWSE”
“All Audiobooks”
“Podcast <name>”
“All Podcasts”
“Video <Name>”*
“All Videos”*
“Video Playlist <name>”*
“All Video Playlists”*
“TV Show <name>”*
“All TV Shows”*
“All Movies”*
“Video Podcast <Name>*
“All Video Podcasts*
“All Music Videos*
“Folder <name>”
“All Folders”
“All Songs”
“Help”
*These commands are only available in USB mode and are
device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC威 is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod威, Zune™, “Plays from device” players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device
by metadata tags. Metadata tags are descriptive software identifiers
embedded in the media files which provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC威 may classify the empty metadata tags as
Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod威 or iPhone威 (if compatible),
you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple威). When the cable is connected to
your iPod威 or iPhone威, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and
the USB port.
384 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s speakers from
your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
To access, press the lower left corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
If you are listening to a Bluetooth Audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth Audio device, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
Bluetooth audio voice commands
“Next”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Previous”
“Help”
A/V Inputs
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (game
systems, personal camcorders, etc.) by
connecting RCA cords (not included) to
these input jacks. The jacks are yellow, red
and white and are located either behind a
small access door on the instrument panel
or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an auxiliary input jack (AIJ) to play
music from your portable music player over your vehicle’s speakers. Plug
in your 1/8 in. (3.5 mm) RCA adapter into the two left A/V input jacks
(red and white).
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then, select A/V inputs.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature, make sure that your portable
music player is designed to be used with headphones and that it is fully
charged. You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in.
(3.5 mm) connectors at one end and a RCA jack at the other.
MyLincoln Touch™ 385
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio and portable device are
turned off.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end into the adaptor in one of the two
left A/V input jacks (white or red) inside the center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select either a tuned
station from the FM tab or the CD tab (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system.) Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening
level.
4. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
5. Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen. Select the A/V in tab.
(You should hear audio from your portable music player although it
may be low.)
6. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between
the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod威 or iPhone威 (if compatible),
you must have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(available for purchase from Apple威). When the cable is connected to
your iPod威 or iPhone威, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and
the USB port.
Note: For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. The AIJ
only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a
volume control.
• Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes
distortion and reduces sound quality.
• If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
• The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
386 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PHONE FEATURES
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC威. Once your
phone is paired, you can access many options using the touchscreen or
voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cellular phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most
cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following
functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dial a number
• Redial
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID
• Phonebook/Caller ID photos
Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, refer to your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC威 is to pair
your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC威. This allows you to
use your phone in a hands-free manner.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen.
2. When prompted, select Add.
3. Select Add Device.
4. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to ON and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. Refer to your phone’s user guide if necessary.
MyLincoln Touch™ 387
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
6. The system asks you if you want to download your phone book.
Depending on your phone’s capability, you may be prompted with
additional options. For more information on your phone’s capability, refer
to your phone’s user guide and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in P (Park).
1. Press Menu > Settings > Phone > Bluetooth Devices > Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to ON and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. Refer to your phone’s user guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC on the screen. The display indicates when the
pairing is successful.
4. The system asks you if you want to download your phone book.
Depending on your phone’s capability, you may be prompted with
additional options. For more information on your phone’s capability, refer
to your phone’s user guide and visit the website.
Making Calls
Press the voice button. When prompted, say “Call <name>” or
say “Dial”, then the desired number.
To end the call or exit phone mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Call information appears
in the display if it’s available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by
pressing the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing and
holding the phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC威 logs it as a missed call.
388 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the
following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call.
During an active call, you can also choose to
mute the call, put it on hold, activate privacy
(returns the call to your cellular phone), join
two calls or end the call.
Quick Dial Select and call contacts stored in your
phonebook contacts and call history folder.
Phone Book Access and call any contacts in your
previously downloaded phone book. The
system will place the entries in alphabetical
categories summarized at the top of the
screen.
To turn on contact picture settings (if your
device supports this feature), press Phone >
Settings > Manage Phonebook > Download
photos from Phonebook > On.
Certain smart phones may support
transferring street addresses when listed with
phone book contact information. If this
feature is supported, you can select and use
these addresses as destinations and also save
them as favorites.
Call History Access any previously dialed, received or
missed calls while your Bluetooth-enabled
phone was connected to SYNC威. You can also
choose to save these to your Favorites or
Quick Dial.
This is a phone-dependent feature. If your
phone does not support downloading call
history using Bluetooth, SYNC威 keeps track of
calls made with the SYNC威 system.
MyLincoln Touch™ 389
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Messaging send text messages using your touchscreen.
Refer to Text messaging later in this section.
Settings Access various phone settings such as
Bluetooth on or off, Manage your Phone Book
and more. Refer to Phone settings later in
this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and cannot
be completed when the vehicle is traveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: SYNC威 does not download read text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth, read them
aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen
• Dial
• Send Text
• View
• Delete
• Delete all
• Download new
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and cannot be completed when
the vehicle is traveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the phone menu.
2. Press Messaging > Send Text.
390 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. You can select Edit Text and use the system keyboard to create a
text message or select from the following options:
Pre-defined text message options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early
I’m outside
I’ll call you when I get there
Ok
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic
Call me later
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 5 mph
(8 km/h), the system offers to read the message to you instead of
allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC威 to read the message to you.
• Reply to send a reply text message.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
MyLincoln Touch™ 391
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings, or Menu > Settings > Phone, then select from
the following settings:
If you select: You can:
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as
well as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth on/off Turn Bluetooth on or off.
Do not disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and
not ring in the vehicle cabin. With this feature
turned on, text message notifications are also
suppressed and do not ring inside the cabin.
911 Assist Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. Refer to 911
Assist™ in the SYNC威 Services and Apps
section.
Phone ringer Select what ring tone you would like to hear
when you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired phone’s
ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or if you would
like the notification to be silent.
Text message
notification
Select how you would like to be notified when
you receive a text message, if supported by your
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones,
text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data
Connection*
Use this screen to make adjustments to your
internet data connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the PAN (personal area
network) or to turn off your connection. You can
also choose to make adjustments to your
settings or have the system always connect,
never connect when roaming or query on
connect. Press ? for additional information.
Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Display call history Display call history.
*If compatible
392 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls. After the
tone, say any of the following commands:
“PHONE”
“Bluetooth Off”
“Bluetooth On”
“Call”
“Call <name>”
“Call <name> at home”
“Call <name> at work”
“Call <name> on cell”
“Call <name> on other”
“Call Voicemail”
“Dial”
“Do not disturb off”
“Do not disturb on”
“Forward text messages”
“Go to hands free”
1
“Hold Call Off”
1
“Hold On”
1
“Join Calls”
1
“Listen to text messages”
“Messages”
2
“Mute Call”
1
“Pair Phone”
“Privacy On”
1
“Reply to text messages”
“Turn Ringer Off”
“Turn Ringer On”
“Un-Mute Call”
1
“Help”
1
These commands are only available during an active call.
2
If you have said “Messages”, refer to the following “Messages” chart.
MyLincoln Touch™ 393
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“MESSAGES”
“Call”
“Forward text messages”
“Listen to text messages”
“Reply to text messages”
“Help”
INFORMATION MENU FEATURES
Under the Information menu, you can access features such as SYNC威
Services, SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ and SYNC Apps or view your calendar
and system notifications.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, press the “i”
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the navigation system, press the corner of the touchscreen
with the green tab.
SYNC姞 Services (If Equipped, U.S. Only)
Note: SYNC威 Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC威 Services. Refer to the
Phone features for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if
you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or
driving conditions.
394 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC威 Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC威 Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS
technology and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you
personalized traffic reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more. For a complete list of services,
or to learn more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC姞 Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC威 Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you’re connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC姞 Services Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, press the
Information button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the navigation system, press the
green tab on your touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
3. To return to the services menu, say “Services” or for help, say “Help”.
MyLincoln Touch™ 395
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
Search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location just say “Business Search” and then “Search Near
Me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination. After the route
download is complete, the phone call is automatically ended.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the navigation feature:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the infotainment display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system and also on the SYNC Services
screen. You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the
Route summary turn list or the Route Status ETA. You can also turn
voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation feature, SYNC Services
downloads your requested destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving
instructions. Refer to the Navigation Features section for more
information.
Disconnecting from SYNC姞 Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Goodbye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
396 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TDI options
Personalizing You can personalize your services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as, work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. To
learn more, log onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report) and say your voice
command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
SYNC姞 Services Voice Commands
When a route has been downloaded (non-navigation systems),
press the voice button on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following commands:
“SYNC SERVICES”
“Services”
“Update Route”
“Route Status”
“Navigation Voice On”
“Navigation Voice Off”
“Cancel Route”
“Next Turn”
“Route Summary”
“Help”
MyLincoln Touch™ 397
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Travel Link™ (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, your vehicle must be
equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD
card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and click on “Coverage map and
details” for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS威
Travel Link™.
Note: Neither SIRIUS威 nor Ford is responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies in the SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ services or its use in vehicles.
SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ (if activated) can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, access the current weather
map, get accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports games.
Press the information button and then select Sirius Travel
Link™, then choose from any of the following services:
When you select: You can:
Traffic On Route Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places (if programmed).
Traffic Nearby
Other Traffic Places
Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s
location or on an active navigation route.
Weather View the nearby weather, current weather, or the
5–day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to
see the weather map which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds. Select Area
to select from a listing of weather locations.
398 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Sports Info. View scores and schedules from a variety of
sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams
for easier access. The score automatically
refreshes when a game is in progress.
Movie Listings View nearby movie theaters and their show times
(if available).
Ski Conditions View ski conditions for a specific area.
SIRIUS姞 Travel Link™ Voice Commands
Note: In order to use SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, your vehicle must be
equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD
card slot.
Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the
following:
“SIRIUS Travel Link”
“Traffic”
“Weather Map”
“Weather”
“5–Day Weather Forecast”
“Movie Listings”
“Fuel Prices ”
“Sports Schedules”*
“Sports Scores”*
“Sports Headlines”*
“Help”
*If you have said, “Sports Scores” or “Sports Schedules” or “Sports
Headlines” you may say any of the commands in the following chart:
Sports-related commands
“NFL”
“College Football”
“NHL”
“College Basketball”
“NBA”
MyLincoln Touch™ 399
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sports-related commands
“WNBA”
“Baseball”
“Golf”
“MLS”
“My Teams”
“Help”
Additional sports-related voice commands
“NFL Scores” “NFL Schedule”
“NFL Headlines” “NBA Scores”
“NBA Schedule” “NBA Headlines”
“NHL Scores” “NHL Schedule”
“NHL Headlines” “Baseball Scores”
“Baseball Schedule” “Baseball Headlines”
“College Football Scores” “College Football Schedule”
“College Football Headlines” “College Basketball Scores”
“College Basketball Schedule” “College Basketball Schedule”
“Motor Sports Order” “Motor Sports Schedule”
“Motor Sports Headlines” “Golf Leaderboard”
“Golf Schedule” “Golf Headlines ”
“WNBA Scores” “MLS Scores”
“WNBA Schedule” “MLS Schedule”
“WNBA Headlines” “MLS Headlines”
“My Teams Scores” “My Teams Schedule”
“My Team Headlines” “Help”
400 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Notifications
Press the information button, then select Notifications. You can
select a message and choose to:
• View the complete message
• Delete the message
• Delete All messages
This screen displays any system messages such as an SD card fault, etc.
Note: The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information
icon yellow. When the messages are read or deleted, the icon returns to
white.
Calendar
Press the information button, then select Calendar. You can
view the current calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist™ (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist™ setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist™ to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately
to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist™ within five
seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not becoming a projectile or get damaged in a
collision. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or
damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist™ from working
properly.
Note: SYNC威 911 Assist™ feature must be set on prior to the incident.
MyLincoln Touch™ 401
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911
Assist™ privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist™ is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist™ is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC威 911 Assist™ works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist™, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, refer to the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, refer to the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist™ On
Press the information button > SYNC Apps. > 911 Assist, then
select ON.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
• Pressing Menu > Settings> Phone > 911 Assist, or
• Pressing Menu > Help > 911 Assist.
To Ensure that 911 Assist™ Works Properly
• SYNC威 must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC威 911 Assist™ feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC威.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
402 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist™); however, if 911 Assist™ is
triggered, SYNC威 tries to contact emergency services. If a connected
phone is damaged or loses connection to SYNC威, SYNC威 searches for,
and tries to connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to
make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC威 provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC威 attempting to dial
911.
• SYNC威 says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC威 will attempt
to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press
and hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a prerecorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist™ May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist™ hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist™ Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist™ is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that
the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist™ may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle
or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
MyLincoln Touch™ 403
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, U.S. Only)
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use.
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription
associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this
feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer
404 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Making a Report
To run a report by touchscreen, touch the information button >
SYNC Apps > Vehicle Health Report.
To run a report by voice command, press the voice button on
the steering wheel and, when prompted, say “Vehicle Health
Report”.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information.
Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you
do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report
profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. Refer to www.SYNCMyRide.com -
Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for
more information.
MENU FEATURES
Under the menu setting, you can set your clock, access and make
adjustments to the display, sound and vehicle settings as well as access
settings for specific modes or the help feature.
Setting the Clock
Note: The date is set by your vehicle’s GPS; you cannot manually set the
date.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, the vehicle needs to acquire
a GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal,
it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time.
1. Press MENU > Clock.
2. Press + and − to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such as 12– or
24–hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system
automatically update new time zones.
Once you update any settings they will be automatically saved.
MyLincoln Touch™ 405
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Display Settings
To access and make adjustments to the touchscreen display, using the
touchscreen:
Press Menu > Display, then choose any of the following:
• Brightness
• Auto Dim On/Off
• Mode: Auto, Day or Night
• Edit Wallpaper
To access and make adjustments to the touchscreen display
using voice commands, press the voice button on your steering
wheel controls and when prompted, say “Display Settings”.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
To access:
Note:
You cannot load photos directly from your camera. You must access
the photos from either your USB mass storage device or from an SD card.
To upload photos, press Menu > Display > Edit Wallpaper, then follow
the system prompts to upload your photographs.
Photo Display Limitations
Only the photograph(s) which meet the following conditions are
displayed:
• Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 378
Photographs with extremely large dimensions (i.e., 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank (black) image on the display.
Sound
Press Menu > Sound to access settings for:
Sound settings
Bass THX Deep Note Demo*
Treble DSP*
Midrange Occupancy Mode*
Balance and Fade Speed Compensated Volume
*If equipped
406 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make adjustments:
1. Press Menu > Vehicle > Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the power button.
Rear View Camera (If Equipped)
This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera.
Press Menu > Vehicle > Reverse camera, then select from the following
settings
• Rear Camera Delay
• Guideline
• Visual Park Aid Alert
Valet Mode
Note: If you are locked out and need to reset the PIN, you can enter
3681 and the system unlocks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system so that none of your
information on the system can be accessed until it is unlocked with the
correct PIN.
1. Press Menu > Vehicle > Valet Mode.
2. Select Enable Valet Mode.
3. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.
After you press Continue the system is locked until the correct PIN is
entered again.
Changing Your Door Keypad Code (If Equipped)
To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press Menu > Vehicle > Edit Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code, then, when prompted, enter your
new code.
Active Park Assist (If Equipped)
When activated, your system will display directions for you regarding the
active park assist process.
For complete information on this system, please refer to Active Park
Assist in the Driving chapter of your Owner’s Guide.
MyLincoln Touch™ 407
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice features, as well as phone,
navigation and wireless settings. Some of these settings can also be
accessed with regard to their specific modes (i.e., phone and media).
System Settings
Press Menu > Settings > System, then select from the following:
System settings
Language Distance Units
Temperature Units System Prompt Volume
Touchscreen Beeps Keyboard Layout
Install Applications Master Reset
Voice Settings
Customize the level of system interaction, help and feedback.
Press Menu > Settings > Voice.
Voice settings
Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more
detailed interaction and guidance.
Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Confirmation
Prompts
Short questions asked by the system when the
system has not clearly heard or understood
your request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned
off, you may be asked to confirm settings
occasionally.
Media Candidate
Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your
voice commands. If these are turned off, the
system will simply make a best guess at your
request.
Phone Candidate
Lists
Voice Control Volume Allows you to adjust the voice volume level.
408 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Media Player Settings
Allows you to customize how the system will interact with your phone,
USB drive and portable media player.
1. Press Menu > Settings > Media player.
2. Select from the following:
• Autoplay on/off: With this feature on, the system will automatically
switch to the media source upon initial connection and you can listen
to music which has already been randomly indexed during the
indexing process. With this feature off, the system will not
automatically switch to the inserted media source.
• Bluetooth Devices: Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a
device. You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
will automatically attempt to connect to that device at every ignition
cycle.
• Gracenote Database Info: Allows you to view the version level of
the Gracenote Database.
• Gracenote Media Management on/off: When turned on, this feature
will pull in metadata information from the Gracenote Database for your
music files. This will override information from your device. This
feature defaults to off.
• Gracenote Cover Art on/off: When turned on, this feature will pull
in cover art from the Gracenote Database for your music files. This
will override any art from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Navigation Settings
To access navigation system settings, press Menu > Settings >
Navigation. Choose from:
• Map Preferences
• Route Preferences
• Navigation Preferences
• Traffic Preferences
• Avoid Areas
MyLincoln Touch™ 409
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Settings
To access phone settings, press Phone > Settings (or press Menu >
Settings > Phone).
If you select: You can:
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device,
as well as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth On/Off Turn Bluetooth on or off.
Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail
and not ring in the vehicle cabin. With this
feature turned on, text message notifications
are also suppressed and do not ring inside the
cabin.
911 Assist Turn 911 Assist™ on or off. Refer to 911
Assist™ in the SYNC威 Services and Apps
section.
Text Message
Notification
Select how you would like to be notified when
you receive a text message, if supported by
your phone. Choose from possible system
alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data
Connection*
Use this screen to make adjustments to your
internet data connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the PAN (personal
area network) or to turn off your connection.
You can also choose to make adjustments to
your settings or have the system always
connect, never connect when roaming or
query on connect. Press ? for additional
information.
Manage Phonebook Access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Display Call History Display call history.
*If compatible
410 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Wireless & Internet
Your system is equipped with Wireless & Internet features and settings.
To access, press Menu > Settings > Wireless and Internet. From this
screen, you can select your:
• Wi-Fi settings
• Bluetooth settings
• USB mobile broadband
• Prioritize connection methods
Wi-Fi
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature which creates a wireless network within
your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (i.e. personal computers or
phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files, play games,
etc. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if:
• You have a USB mobile broadband connection inside the vehicle
• Your phone supports PAN (personal area networking)
• You are parked outside of a wireless hotspot
To access, press Menu > Settings > Wireless and Internet > Wi-Fi
settings, then select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Wi-Fi Network
(Client) Mode
On/Off
Turn the Wi-Fi feature on or off in your vehicle.
Make sure that On is selected for connectivity
purposes.
Choose a Wireless
Network
Use a previously stored wireless network. You can
categorize by alphabetical listing, Priority and
Signal Strength. You can also choose to search for
a network, connect to a network, disconnect from
a network, receive more information, prioritize a
network or delete a network.
Search for Wireless
Networks
View a list of wireless networks.
Gateway Access
Point Mode (On/Off)
Make SYNC an access point for a phone or a
computer by turning this feature on. This forms
the local area network within the vehicle for
things such as game playing, file transfer, internet
browsing, etc.
Gateway Access
Point Device List
View who has connected to your Wi-Fi connection
recently.
MyLincoln Touch™ 411
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the ? button (if available) for additional information.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
USB Mobile Broadband
Note: You must activate your mobile
broadband device on your PC prior to
connecting it to the system.
Note: USB mobile broadband settings may not be displayed if the device
is already activated.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband
connection to access the internet. This screen allows you to set up what
is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection. You can
select the following:
• Country
• Carrier
• Phone Number
• User Name
• Password
Prioritize Connection Methods
This screen allows you to choose your connection methods and change
them as needed. You can select to Change Order and have the system
either always attempt to connecting using a USB mobile broadband or
using Wi-Fi.
Bluetooth姞 Settings
This screen shows you what device is currently paired with the system as
well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,
set as favorite, delete and add device.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
412 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Help!
Your touchscreen system has a help feature which you can access at any
time.
To access Help using the touchscreen, press Menu > Help, the choose
from the following:
If you select: You can:
Where Am I? View the vehicle’s current location.
If your vehicle is equipped with navigation,
you see your location on a map.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, or if your SD card is not inserted,
you receive your vehicle’s latitude and
longitude.
911 Assist Access the 911 Assist™ settings, vehicle
restart instructions and emergency quick dial
contacts.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial:
This feature allows you to save up to two
numbers as ICE contacts for quick access in
the event of an emergency. Select Edit to
access your phonebook and then select the
desired contacts. The numbers then appear as
options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE
2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select are
presented to you at the completion of the 911
Assist call process for quick access.
Voice Command List View possible voice commands.
From this screen, you can also access System information, Software
Licenses and Driving Restrictions.
To access Help using the voice commands, press the voice
button, then, after the tone, say “Help”. The system provides
voice commands that can be used in the current mode.
MyLincoln Touch™ 413
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOUCHSCREEN CLIMATE CONTROLS
Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your
climate control features. Depending on your vehicle line and
option package, your climate screen may look different than
what is shown here.
A. Power: Touch to turn the system on and off. Outside air cannot enter
the vehicle when the system is off.
B. Passenger settings:
• Touch DUAL to turn on the passenger side temperature control.
• Touch the red or blue arrow to increase or decrease the temperature.
• Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped).
• Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat (if equipped).
C. Fan speed: Touch + to increase or – to decrease fan speed.
D. Recirculated air: Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which:
• May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior.
• May help reduce odors from reaching the interior.
• Engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected.
• May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost.
• May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.
A
I H G
C
B
K
J
F E D
414 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
E. MAX A/C: Touch to cool the vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again
for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C:
• Distributes air through instrument panel vents.
• Is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode
• May help reduce odors from entering the vehicle.
F. A/C: Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off.
• Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
• Engages automatically in MAX A/C, defrost and floor/defrost.
G. AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
controls:
• Fan speed
• Airflow distribution
• A/Conoroff
• Outside or recirculated air
H. Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated
mirrors (if equipped).
I. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again
to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost:
• Provides outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
J. Manual controls: Select any of the following airflow distribution
modes:
• Floor/Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides
outside air to reduce window fogging.
• Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• Panel/Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
• Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents.
MyLincoln Touch™ 415
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
K. Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you
may have the following features:
• Touch the red or blue arrow to increase or decrease the temperature.
• Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped).
Refer to the Seats chapter.
• Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat (if equipped).
Refer to the Seats chapter.
• Touch and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like the
vehicle to remember and maintain for you.
• Touch the heated steering wheel icon (if equipped) to turn warm the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is not heated between the 10
o’clock and 2 o’clock positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu
level of a voice session. For example, press the voice button and
after the prompt, “Say a command”; say any of the following
commands:
Climate control voice commands
“Climate On”
“Climate Off”
“Climate Automatic”
“Climate My Temperature”
“Climate Temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Climate Temperature <59–86> degrees”
“Help”
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access
them, you have to say “Climate” first, then when the system is ready to
listen, you may say any of the following commands:
Additional climate control voice commands
“Automatic” “Dual Off”
“Off” “On”
“A/C Off” “A/C On”
“Max A/C On” “Max A/C Off”
“Defrost On” “Defrost Off”
416 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional climate control voice commands
“Rear Defrost On” “Rear Defrost Off”
“Recirc On” “Recirc Off”
“Panel On” “Panel Floor On”
“Floor On” “Windshield Floor On”
“Temperature High” “Temperature Low”
“Fan Increase” “Fan Decrease”
“Temperature”* “Temperature Increase”
“Temperature Decrease” “Temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Temperature <59–86>
degrees”
“My Temp”
“Help”
*If you have said “Temperature”, you can say any of the commands in
the following “Temperature” chart.
“TEMPERATURE”
“High”
“Low”
“<15.5–29.5> degrees”
“<59–86> degrees”
“Help”
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the
navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see your
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, just
push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out to
remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination
mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner of your touchscreen, then
the Dest button when it appears. Refer to Setting a destination.
To view the navigation map and the vehicle’s current location, touch the
green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen, or, press
Dest > Map. Refer to Map mode.
MyLincoln Touch™ 417
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen, then the Dest button when
it appears. Choose any of the following:
Destination selections
My Home Street Address
Favorites Intersection
Previous Destinations City Center
Point of Interest (POI) Map
Emergency Previous Starting Point
Freeway Entrance/Exit Latitude/Longitude
1.
Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry, the Go! button appears once all
the necessary information has been entered. Pressing the Go! button
makes the address location to appear on the map. If you choose
Previous Destination, the last 20 destinations you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your destination. You can also choose to
set this as a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way
to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. Any Avoid Areas
selections are also considered in route calculation.
3.
Choose from up to three different types of routes, then select Start Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance possible.
• Eco (EcoRoute): Uses the most fuel efficient route.
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you.
Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways, toll
roads, ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use HOV lanes.
(HOV lanes are High Occupancy Vehicle Lanes also known as carpool or
diamond lanes. These lanes are reserved for people who ride in buses,
vanpools or carpools.)
Note: If Start Route button is not pressed and the vehicle is driven on a
recognized road, the system defaults to the fastest route option and
begins guidance.
During route guidance, the “talking bubble” icon that appears in the
upper right navigation corner (green bar) can be pressed if the user
wants the system to repeat a route guidance instruction. Instructions
decrease with each press.
418 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POI Categories
Your system offers a variety if POI (Points of Interest) categories.
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining Automotive
Travel & Transportation Shopping
Financial Entertainment & Arts
Emergency Recreation & Sports
Community Government
Health & Medicine Domestic Services
Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt. Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the POI listing.
The system also allows you to sort the POIs alphabetically, by distance or
by cityseekr listings (if available).
cityseekr (If Available)
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI) information is limited to
approximately 154 cities (132 in the U.S., 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico).
MyLincoln Touch™ 419
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
cityseekr is a service which provides
additional information about certain POIs
such as restaurants, hotels and
attractions.
When you have selected a POI, the
location and information appear, such as
address and phone number. If the POI is
listed with cityseekr, you also see
information such as a brief description, check-in and check-out times,
when the restaurant is open, etc.
Press More Information for a longer review, a list of services and
facilities, the average room or meal price as well as the website.
This screen displays the POI icon such as:
Hotel
Coffeehouse
Food & Drink
Nightlife
Attraction
This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
420 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you are viewing additional information for hotels, cityseekr will
also tell you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons:
Hotel services and facilities
Restaurant 24 Hr Room Service
Business Center Fitness Center
Handicap Facilities Internet Access
Laundry Pool
Refrigerator Wi-Fi
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information such as star rating,
average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website
address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information such as star rating, price
category, review, check in/out times, hotel service icons and website
address.
MyLincoln Touch™ 421
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route. Press Menu > Settings > Navigation.
When you select: You can:
Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Choose how you want to view the turn list
(top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top).
Set the automatic parking POI notification.
When parking POI notification is on, parking
POI icons display on the map when you get
close to your destination. (This may not be
very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map if other POIs are also set for display.)
Route Preferences Avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries and car
trains when planning your route.
Use HOV lanes (if available), and have the
system always select the shortest distance,
fastest time or most economical route.
Navigation Preferences Choose prompts to be either voice or tone
only.
Have the system automatically fill in the state
and province based on the information already
entered into the system.
422 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Traffic Preferences Choose how you want the system to handle
traffic problems along your route.
Automatic: Have the system reroute you to
avoid traffic incidents that develop and impact
the current route (no notification is
provided).
Manual: Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic incidents
along the planned route. You have a choice to
accept or ignore the notification before the
route deviation is made.
Turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map (road work, incidents, accidents, closed
roads, etc.).
Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you. Press
Add to select a category.
Once you make a selection, the system tries
to avoid the area(s) if possible for all routes.
To delete a selection, choose the listing on the
screen; when the screen changes to Avoid
Areas Edit, press Delete at the bottom right
of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view
map mode. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D
city maps as well as 3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use and
land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential
cities around the globe. These maps also contain features such as town
blocks, building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects which are typically
recognizable and have a certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks appear
in 3D map mode only.
MyLincoln Touch™ 423
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Change the appearance of the
display by repeatedly pressing the
arrow in the upper left corner of the
screen.
Heading up always shows the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 mi (4 km). For larger map scales, this setting is remembered,
but the map is shown in North up only. If the scale returns below
this level, then Heading up is restored.
North up always shows the northern direction to be upward on
the screen.
3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. This
viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
Re-centering the map can be done by pressing this icon
whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle’s current
location.
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows current location of the vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display, except when in scroll mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the icon is fixed in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor is
in a window on the top center part of the screen.
424 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Address book entry default icon(s) indicate the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by
any method other than the map. A different icon can be selected
from the 22 icons available; each icon can be used more than
once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. Only one entry from the Address Book can be
saved as Home. This icon cannot be changed.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons can be displayed on the map
and can be turned on or off. There are about 56 subcategories of
POIs that can be selected to be displayed on the map one at a
time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on
the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may be
intermittently displayed under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
MyLincoln Touch™ 425
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Quick-Touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select: You can:
Set as Dest Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then press Set as Dest.)
Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites Save the current location to your favorites.
POI Icons On/Off Select POI icons to be displayed on the map.
Up to three icons can be selected for display
on the map at the same time.
Cancel Route Cancel the active route.
View/Edit Route Access these features when a route is active:
View route
Edit destination/waypoints
Edit turn list
Detour
Edit route preferences
Edit traffic preferences
Cancel route
Rotate the map view by swiping
your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
Navteq is the digital map provider for
the navigation application. If you find
map data errors, you may report
them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com.
Navteq evaluates all reported map
errors and responds with the result of
their investigation by e-mail.
426 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS or going to www.navteq.com. You
need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there
is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone, say any of the following
commands:
Navigation system voice commands
“Cancel Next Waypoint”
1
“Navigation”
3
“Cancel Route”
1
“Repeat Instruction”
1
“Destination”
2
“Show 3D”
“Destination <Nametag>” “Show Heading Up”
“Destination <POI Category>” “Show Map”
“Destination Favorites” “Show North Up”
“Destination Home” “Show Route”
1
“Destination Intersection” “Show Turn List”
1
“Destination Nearest <POI
Category>”
“Voice Off”
“Destination Nearest POI” “Voice On”
“Destination Play Nametags” “Voice Volume Decrease”
“Destination POI” “Voice Volume Increase”
“Destination Nearest <POI
Category>”
“Where Am I?”
“Destination Previous
Destination”
“Zoom In”
“Destination Street Address” “Zoom Out”
“Detour”
1
“Help”
1
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
2
If you have said the command, “Navigation”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart.
3
These commands are only available when a navigation route is active.
MyLincoln Touch™ 427
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“DESTINATION”
“<Nametag>”
“<POI Category>”
“Favorites”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest <POI Category>”
“Nearest POI”
“Play Nametags”
“POI Category”
“Previous Destination”
“Street Address”
“Help”
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination”*
“Zoom City”
“Zoom Country”
“Zoom in Minimum”
“Zoom out Maximum”
“Zoom Province”
“Zoom State”
“Zoom Street”
“Zoom to <Distance>”
“Help”
*If you have said, “Destination”, you may say any of the commands in
the Destination chart.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card navigation feature, you have
the ability to enter in a street address using a new feature called One
Shot Destination Street Address. When you say either “Navigation
Destination Street Address” or “Destination Street Address”, the system
asks you to say the full address. The system displays an example
on-screen. You can then speak the address naturally, such as “One two
three four Main Street, Anytown”.
428 MyLincoln Touch™
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
(“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THRID PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as
⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Appendices 429
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
430 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded
to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
Appendices 431
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party
sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE
as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
432 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers.
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed
materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as
well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
Appendices 433
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
End user notice
Microsoft姞 Windows姞 Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide can
lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
434 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system
settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these
operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some
functions you might be required to distract your attention away from
the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged
attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if
your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical
time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Appendices 435
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
436 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may
pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that
otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to
comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal
judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places
you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider
to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input
destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your
vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful
purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not
interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the
TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your
failure to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav
with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself,
and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to
access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure
purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other
parties.
Appendices 437
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express
written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter,
any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense
or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of
your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party,
(ii) violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not
limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and
child protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening,
abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without
advanced written permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such
high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
438 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR 09/22/09
- 10 of 19 - Confidential GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE
LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered
by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of
the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award
rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having
jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both
TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
Appendices 439
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign
this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav
Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and
its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively,
“Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting
them on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver
of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions
of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will
not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in
connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used
in this Agreement, the words “include” and “including,” and variations thereof,
will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be
followed by the words “without limitation.”
440 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell
or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement,
and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your
retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within thirty (30) days
of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To contact NT, please
visit www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase 威.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service 威
to publish and sell ZIP+4 威 information.
娀 United States Postal Service 威 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service 威. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
Appendices 441
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or
other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree
not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if:
(a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use
it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained
from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error
free.
442 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;
OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS,
OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent
the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Appendices 443
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User
License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer,
federal government agency, or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ
prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote姞 Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright
娀2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
444 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If so, all
of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of
the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign,
copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any
third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide, including any
copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each company’s own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
Appendices 445
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF
ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE
CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE
THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE
THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL
DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE
FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS
THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
446 Appendices
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................401
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................177
Accessing and using your USB
port ............................................380
Accessing your calendar ..........401
Accessory delay ..........................95
Adaptive Cruise Control ...........188
Adding (pairing) a phone ........388
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................44
and child safety seats ..............45
description ................................44
disposal ......................................54
driver airbag ..............................44
passenger airbag .......................44
side airbag ...........................44, 49
Air cleaner filter ...............265, 317
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................170
Ambient mood/lighting .............407
AM/FM .......................................361
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................177
Anti-theft system ..................78, 80
arming the system ..............78, 80
disarming a triggered system ..80
Armrests ....................................139
Audio system
Single CD ................................125
Audio system (see Radio) .......125
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................164
fluid, adding ............................258
fluid, checking ........................258
fluid, refill capacities ..............313
fluid, specification ..................313
Selectshift (SST) ....................165
Auxiliary Input Jack .................373
Auxiliary powerpoint ................147
A/V inputs ..........................126, 385
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........313
B
Battery .......................................261
acid, treating emergencies .....261
jumping a disabled battery ....230
maintenance-free ....................261
replacement, specifications ...317
servicing ..................................261
Blind Spot Information
System .......................................196
Booster seats ...............................21
Brakes ........................................176
anti-lock ...................................177
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................177
brake warning light ................177
fluid, checking and adding ....260
fluid, refill capacities ..............313
fluid, specifications .................313
lubricant specifications ..........313
parking ....................................177
shift interlock ..........................166
trailer .......................................219
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....313
Cargo management system ......207
Cargo net ...................................206
Index 447
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CD ..............................................125
CD player ..........................123, 376
CD voice commands .................376
Cell phone use ............................14
Changing a tire .........................305
Child safety restraints ..........26, 28
Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....28
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................35
LATCH .......................................26
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................21
Cleaning the touchscreen ........348
Cleaning your vehicle ...............273
engine compartment ..............275
instrument panel ....................277
interior .....................................276
plastic parts ............................274
washing ....................................273
waxing .....................................275
wheels ......................................278
wiper blades ............................276
Climate voice commands .........416
Clock ..................................125, 405
Collision Warning System .........201
Console ......................................148
overhead ..................................148
Coolant
checking and adding ..............254
refill capacities ........................313
specifications ..........................313
Cross Traffic Alert ....................196
Cruise control ...........................187
Customer Assistance ................228
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................322, 325
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................237
Getting roadside assistance ...228
Getting the service you
need .........................................233
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................239
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................237
Customizing your home
screen ........................................347
D
Defrost .......................................127
rear window ............................129
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................258
engine oil .................................253
Display settings .........................406
Driving under special
conditions ..................168, 171, 174
sand .........................................172
snow and ice ...........................174
through water .................173, 225
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................127
E
Electronic message center .......107
Electronic stability control ......180
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................230
running out of fuel .................157
448 Index
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Emergency brake
(see Parking brake) ..................177
Emission control system ..........161
End user license agreement ....429
Engine ........................................312
cleaning ...................................275
fail-safe cooling .......................256
idle speed control ...................261
lubrication specifications .......313
refill capacities ........................313
service points ..........................253
Engine block heater .................153
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............253
dipstick ....................................253
filter, specifications ................317
refill capacities ........................313
specifications ..........................313
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................153
F
Fail safe cooling ........................256
Fleet MyKey programming ........62
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....155
Floor mats .................................226
Fluid capacities .........................313
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
driving off road .......................170
Fuel
cap ...........................................159
capacity ...................................313
choosing the right fuel ...........156
filler funnel .............................157
filling your vehicle with fuel ..159
filter, specifications ........260, 317
fuel pump shut-off ..................229
octane rating ...................156, 312
running out of fuel .................157
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................155
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................155
Fuses ..........................241–242, 246
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............159
Gauges .......................................101
H
Hazard flashers .........................229
HD Radio™ ...............................364
Headlamps
aiming ......................................266
bulb specifications ..................272
flash to pass ..............................88
high beam .................................88
replacing bulbs .......................268
Head restraints .........................132
Heating ......................................127
Help ............................................413
Hill start assist ..........................168
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................142
Home screen .............................347
Hood ..........................................251
How to use voice commands ...354
I
Ignition ...............................149, 312
Illuminated visor mirror .............98
Index 449
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information displays .................107
Infotainment display .................352
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................163
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................277
cluster ......................................101
Intelligent Access Key ................56
J
Jack ............................................305
positioning ...............................305
storage .....................................305
Jump-starting your vehicle ......230
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................70
keypad .......................................75
locking and unlocking doors ....77
programming entry code .........75
Keys .............................................78
positions of the ignition .........149
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................272
headlamps, flash to pass ..........88
interior lamps .....................92–93
replacing bulbs .......................268
LATCH anchors ...........................26
Liftgate ..........................69, 72, 209
Lights, warning and indicator ..101
Listening to music ....................360
Loading pictures .......................406
Load limits .................................209
Locks
autolock .....................................70
childproof ..................................30
doors ..........................................68
Lubricant specifications ...........313
Lug nuts ....................................310
M
Making and receiving calls .......388
MAP DVD - Loading and
Unloading ..................................388
Map icons ..................................424
Map mode ..................................423
Map preferences .......................422
Map updates ..............................427
Message center .........................107
warning messages ...................114
Mirrors ...................................95, 97
fold away ...................................96
programmable memory ............58
side view mirrors (power) .......95
Moon roof ....................................98
Motorcraft威 parts ..............273, 317
MyFord Touch™ system ..........345
MyKey ..........................................62
MyLincoln Touch™ system ......125
N
Navigation features ...................417
Navigation voice commands ....427
Notifications ..............................401
O
Octane rating ............................156
450 Index
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Overdrive ...................................166
P
Pairing other phones ................388
Pairing your phone ...................387
Pairing your phone for the first
time ............................................387
Parental MyKey programming ...62
Parking brake ............................177
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........317
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor ...................46
Phone settings ..................392, 410
Phone voice commands ............393
POI categories ...........................419
Point of Interest (POI) .............419
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................242
Power door locks ........................68
Power liftgate ..............................72
Power mirrors .............................95
Powerpoint ................................147
Power steering ..........................205
fluid, checking and adding ....260
fluid, refill capacity ................313
fluid, specifications .................313
Power Windows ...........................94
Privacy information ..................351
Push button start system .........150
Q
Quick touch buttons .................426
R
Radio ..........................................125
AM/FM .....................................361
Single CD ................................125
Radio reception .........................123
Radio voice commands .............363
Rear heated seats .....................140
Rear view camera
display ................................183, 407
Rear window defroster .............127
Receiving a text message .........391
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................22
Relays ................................241–242
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................71
locking/unlocking doors ...........68
opening the trunk .....................69
replacing the batteries .............57
Reverse sensing system ...........182
Roadside assistance ..................228
Roll stability control .................180
Roof rack ...................................208
Route preferences ....................422
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............40
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) .........33, 37
Safety defects, reporting ..239–240
Safety information ....................349
Safety restraints ..............33–35, 37
Belt-Minder威 .............................37
Index 451
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Belt-Minder威,
deactivating/activating .............39
extension assembly ..................36
for adults .............................33, 35
for children .........................18, 22
Occupant Classification
Sensor ........................................46
safety belt maintenance ...........40
seat belt maintenance ..............40
warning light and chime ..........37
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ........................................26
Safety seats for children ......18, 22
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................318
Satellite Radio ...................125, 370
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............331
SD card ......................126, 377, 417
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............33
Seats ..........................................138
child safety seats ................18, 22
climate control ........................137
easy access/easyout feature ..136
front seats .......................133, 136
heated ......................................140
memory seat .....................58, 135
second row seats ....................138
Second-row power fold seat ....138
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ..........................................75
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................78
Sending new text messages .....390
Setting a destination ................417
Setting a destination by
voice ...........................................418
Setting the clock ...............125, 405
Setting your wallpaper .............406
Side air curtain ...........................51
Side-curtain airbags system .......51
SIRIUS威 satellite radio .............370
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................372
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................398
SIRIUS Travel Link voice
commands .................................399
SOS Post Crash Alert .................43
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................312, 317
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................313
Stability system .........................180
Starting your vehicle ................152
jump starting ..........................230
push button start system .......150
Steering wheel ............................81
controls ......................................83
tilting .........................................81
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................44
Supported media file types ......384
Supported player, media
formats and metadata
information ................................384
SYNC威 Services .........................394
System settings .........................408
452 Index
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ...............127
Text messaging .........................390
Tilt steering wheel ......................81
Tires ...........................284–285, 305
alignment ................................298
care ..........................................284
changing ..........................305, 307
checking the pressure ............294
inflating ...................................292
label .........................................291
replacing ..................................296
rotating ....................................299
safety practices .......................298
sidewall information ...............287
snow tires and chains ............300
spare tire .................................305
terminology .............................286
tire grades ...............................285
treadwear ........................285, 294
Towing .......................217, 221–222
recreational towing .................222
trailer towing ..........................217
wrecker ....................................221
Traction control ........................178
Traffic preferences ...................422
Trailer sway control ..................217
Transmission
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....166
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................258
fluid, refill capacities ..............313
lubricant specifications ..........313
Turn signal ..................................92
U
USB port ............................126, 380
V
Vehicle health report ................404
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................317
Vehicle loading ..........................209
Ventilating your vehicle ...........153
Voice recognition ......................353
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .....101
Washer fluid ..............................260
Water, Driving through .............225
Wi-Fi ..........................................411
Windows
power .........................................94
rear wiper/washer .....................87
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................86
checking and adding fluid .....260
replacing wiper blades ...........264
Wrecker towing .........................221
Index 453
2013 MKX (mkx)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
